Home

Honeywell Analytics Touchpoint Pro User Manual

Contents

1. Figure 14 1 Removing the Control Module cover 4 Remove the two M4 locknut screws at the top of the cover 5 Loosen the M4 locknut screw on the underside of the cover 6 Carefully slide the cover off 7 Locate the position for the Bus Interface Board four stand offs pillars to the right side of the Control Module motherboard 8 Align the connectors and gently push into place 178 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 14 Appendix 1 Modbus Option 9 Secure the Bus Interface Board using the four sets of screws and washers supplied 10 Carefully slide the cover back into place and secure using the M4 locknuts 11 Re connect all cables back in place 12 Apply power to the system BIB Module Figure 14 2 Attaching the BIB 14 2 2 Cable recommendation The cable used should be suitable data communication cable allowing for the installation distance and environmental factors If spurs are used they should be no longer than 1m each with a maximum of 10m total for an installation The maximum operating distance without the use of line repeaters is 1 2km 3900ft The terminals will accept a maximum wire size of 1 5mm7 179 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 14 Appendix 1 Modbus Option 14 2 3 Electrical connections The electrical connections are shown below
2. Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board Modbus Interface Board with 100mm plinth forced ventilation TPPR HF F LXXXPF with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs with 100mm plinth forced ventilation oor Standing Cabin D Card w o HON Log oO oO TPPR HF F LRXXPF oor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs TPPR HF F LXMXPF oor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs D Card Modbus Interface Board with 100mm plinth w o HON Logo forced ventilation oO F S F SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board with 100mm plinth w o HON Logo forced ventilation F S TPPR HF F LRMXPF Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board Modbus Interface Board with 100mm plinth w o HON Logo forced ventilation Forced ventilation with plinth without power distribution TPPR HF FS LXXHPF Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs D Card with 100mm plinth forced ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF FS LRXHPF oor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D incl
3. Error Message Possible Cause Remedial Action Code 31 State Change operation failed could Potential issue with the 1 Check the Active Events screen for any reported not communicate with 1 0 Module ring network connection failure of the ring communication In this case refer or damaged faulty 1 0 to Error 37 Ring communication failed Module 2 Check that the I O Module is properly seated on the DIN rail 3 If the error persists remove the module and check for any damage to the connector on the DIN rail 4 In this case it may be possible to move the module to another slot 5 lf the connector is damaged contact your local representative to obtain a replacement DIN rail PCB assembly 6 If no damage is apparent to the connector and the module fails to operate in another slot then the module may be faulty Follow the procedure in Maintenance Replace an I O Module to replace it 32 The user could not be added A user User already exists Create the new user with a different name with the same name already exists on the system 33 User could not be added maximum The system has the Remove another user so that the new user can be number of 20 users reached maximum number of created users 34 The Username Password is Incorrect user name 1 Check that the user name and password are incorrect please try again password or access level correct 2 Confirm that the user has the required access level see sum
4. Modbus RTU Interface Terminal TB6 TB7 1 A1 IN A2 IN 2 B1 IN B2 IN 3 A1 OUT A2 OUT 4 B1 OUT B2 OUT 5 Drain TB6 Drain TB7 Note The respective IN and OUT terminals are connected together internally i e A1 IN is connected to A1 OUT 14 2 4 Configuration Examples The Modbus interface consists of two independent Modbus ports The RS485 connections are located on terminals TB6 and TB7 of the Control Module For convenience IN and OUT terminals are provided which are connected together internally The diagram below gives example configurations of which the second and third offer redundancy 14 2 5 Termination resistor If the Touchpoint Pro is the last node in a Modbus system highway it is necessary to connect a termination resistor between A and B to avoid reflections on the RS485 circuit For convenience Touchpoint Pro has a set of jumpers which will switch a 120 resistor across the connection In this case the RS485 IN and OUT terminals are no longer connected together internally and the OUT terminals are floating Only the IN terminals should be used Note The default configuration for the jumpers is with the termination resistance off 180 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 14 Appendix 1 Modbus Option Touchpoint Pro Host Mobus Master Touchpoint Pro Host Mobus Master Touchpoint Pro Host Mobus Master Touchpoint Pro Host
5. Battery Description Battery Type Location Replaceable 12 V Rechargeable Battery Valve Regulated Lead Acid Battery backup unit for the Yes VRLA Sealed Battery Power Supply optional Batteries contain various active ingredients which store electrochemical energy and can be dangerous if they contact your skin Removal and Disposal Information The symbol below means that according to local laws and regulations the battery installed within your product should be disposed of separately from household waste When the battery reaches its end of life take it to a collection point designated by local authorities Pb 1 5 Restriction of Hazardous Substances RoHS Directive Touchpoint Pro is compliant with the requirements of the RoHS Directive 1 6 Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment WEEE Directive household or municipal waste Waste electrical products end of life should be recovered recycled where suitable specialist WEEE disposal facilities exist For more information about gum ecycling of this product contact your local authority our agent distributor or the manufacturer X This symbol indicates that this product and or parts of the product may not be treated as MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 1 Safety and Information 1 7 Information This manual is for use with the Touchpoint Pro The reader of this Operating Manual should ensure that it is appropriate in all details
6. TPPR HF R LXXXPX Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card w o HON Logo with 100mm plinth w o ventilation TPPR HF R LRXXPX Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board with 100mm plinth w o HON Logo w o ventilation TPPR HF R LXMXPX Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Modbus Interface Board with 100mm plinth w o HON Logo w o ventilation TPPR HF R LRMXPX Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board Modbus Interface Board with 100mm plinth w o HON Logo w o ventilation Without ventilation with plinth without power distribution TPPR HF RS LXXHPX Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card with 100mm plinth w o ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF RS LRXHPX Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board with 100mm plinth w o ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF RS LXMHPX Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Modbus Interface Board with 100mm plinth w
7. Note Channel Location Tag and Channel Custom ID only require Engineer level access for editing 15 1 2 Field Device Selection Access Level Administrator Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range Comment Field Device Name Generic Field Device Maximum 30 Alphanumeric If the sensor catalogue is used a list of available field Characters devices will be displayed for selection If copy channel is being used this value cannot be changed Sensor Name Generic Sensor Maximum 30 Alphanumeric If the sensor catalogue is used a list of available Characters gases and ranges will be displayed for selection If copy channel is being used this value cannot be changed 192 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 15 Appendix 2 Configurable Parameter Reference Guide 15 1 3 Sensor Settings Access Level Administrator Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range Comment Gas Name Gas Maximum 10 Alphanumeric Characters Gas Unit FSD FSD LEL Vol ppm ppb mA mV mg FSD Full Scale Deflection m3 LEL m or maximum 5 Alphanumeric LEL Lower Explosive Limit Characters LEL m LEL metres 15 1 4 Range Settings Access Level Administrator Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range Comment Signal Range Min 4mA 0 5 mA to 4 mA X1 Signal Range Min Electrical Input from Sensor Sig
8. oO Forced ventilation with plinth without power distribution TPPR HF RS LXXHPF Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card with 100mm plinth forced ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF RS LRXHPF Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board with 100mm plinth forced ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF RS LXMHPF Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Modbus Interface Board with 100mm plinth forced ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF RS LRMHPF Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board Modbus Interface Board with 100mm plinth forced ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF RS LXXXPF Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card w o HON Logo with 100mm plinth forced ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF RS LRXXPF Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board with 100mm plinth w o HON Logo forced ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF RS LXMXPF Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D incl
9. Terminal Identification Label Channel Field device 1 V Input 1 24 Vdc 2 SIG 4 20 mA signal 3 V 0 Vdc 4 V Input 2 24 Vdc 5 SIG 4 20 mA signal 6 V 0 Vdc 7 V Input 3 24 Vdc 8 SIG 4 20 mA signal 9 V 0 Vdc 10 V Input 4 24 Vdc 11 SIG 4 20 mA signal 12 V OV de 57 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 4 Electrical Installation 3 Wire Detector Touchpoint Pro a 24 Vide Ses ee A o IVd Figure 4 10 Three wire device 2 Wire Detector Touchpoint Pro Ric ee a fey ee ae 24 Vdc E 0 Vdc Figure 4 11 Two wire loop powered device 58 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 4 Electrical Installation 2 Wire Detector Touchpoint Pro ee Barrier Se 24 Vdc Figure 4 12 Two wire device with a barrier Note For intrinsically safe I S field devices please refer to the device manufacturer s instructions for details of suitable approved I S barriers and interconnections 2 Wire Detector Touchpoint Pro SN Barrier 24 Vde Figure 4 13 Two wire device with a barrier 59 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 4 Electrical Installation 2 Wire Detector Touchpoint Pro BNN Isolated Barrier pS 24 Vde Figure 4 14 Two wire device with a isolated barrier 4 8 5 Analogue Input Module mV Bridge Note Channel wiring is from left to right for terminals o
10. ry 5 Definition 1 5 Name Characters on the Input Details screen ustom Transmitter Fault 3 0 mA 1 0 to 3 9 mA The recommended minimum difference between 1 5 Level Max Fault Level Max and Fault Level Min is 0 2 mA ustom Transmitter Fault 2 0 mA 0 8 to 3 8 mA 1 5 Level Min ustom Transmitter Fault Latching Non Latching Latching 1 5 Latch ustom Transmitter Fault Fault Fault Warning Select whether the custom fault should be treated as a fault condition or as a warning condition 200 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 15 Appendix 2 Configurable Parameter Reference Guide 15 2 Analogue Input Module mV Bridge The Analogue Input Module mV Bridge has the option to use the sensor catalogue basic extended configure a custom channel or copy from a configured channel basic extended Note When making changes using Extended options it is the user s responsibility to determine whether other settings have been affected and to make any corresponding changes If a basic configuration is selected only the first two screens detailed below will be used Commission Channel and Field Device Selection The rest of the configuration will be programmed automatically either from the sensor catalogue or from the channel that is being copied Note If a channel is configured from the sensor catalogue it is possible to edit individual settings afterwards see Section
11. Be aware that extended exposure of a detector element to certain concentrations of combustible gases and air can introduce stress to the element that may seriously affect its performance and therefore recalibration should be carried out or the sensor replaced or both after an alarm due to an indication of a high concentration When used in a Gas Detection summing up role the gas reading may be higher than the actual concentration at any one detector head location or it may be the actual concentration at one specific detector head Cautions 1 The USB Device port is for Maintenance use only End users should use only the USB Host port with a USB Flash drive adaptor and backup restore upgrades should only be performed with the system in Maintenance mode 2 Touchpoint Pro power supply units Ring Coupling Modules and Input Output Modules have no user serviceable parts In the unlikely event of a failure the power supply unit or module must be replaced using only manufacturer supplied parts 3 Do not use sharp objects to operate the touchscreen as this could irreparably damage the User Interface and adversely affect its IP rating 4 Use only soft damp cloths or screen wipes to clean the Touchpoint Pro Do not use solvents or abrasives as they will damage the User Interface 5 Once commissioned Touchpoint Pro is intended for continuous operation MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 1
12. Equipment Title SIP LOIN SOS Pe INTs Limits for Voltage Power T CE Mark and Notified Body for Production Supervision 12 SIRA ATEX IECEx Certificate Numbers 13 ATEX IECEx Hazardous Area Certification Details 14 US Canadian Hazardous Location and Zone Certification Details 15 Manufacturer s Master Contract Number and Canadian US Performance Identification 16 CSA Monogram Canada and USA Certified Figure 5 Example Remote Wall Mount Zone 2 Div 2 Rating Label Honeywell Analytics Ltd Poole Dorset UK BH17 ORZ Touchpoint Pro Analogue Input Module 4 20 mA Part No 2400B1000 Supply 24 Vdc 18 32 Vdc Sensor outputs 24 Vdc 18 32 Vdc 1A max per sensor 4 Total Le Power Consumption 0 8 W max ex sensor MC 171882 supply 129 W max inc max sensor supply Temperature Range 40 C to 70 C FM 6310 6320 Serial No UDID Mod state 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 19 Read and understand manual before installation operating or servicing Do not disconnect terminals or remove module when energised Lire et comprendre le manuel avant d installer d utiliser ou de r parer l quipement r Figure 6 Touchpoint Pro AIM mA Rating Label SIRA 15 ATEX 4028U IECEx SIR 15 0015U 113 G Ex nA IIC T4 Gc Tamb 40 C to 70 C NON INCENDIVE Class I DIV 2 ABCD T4 Class Zone 2 AEx nA IIC T4 Class I Zone 2 Ex nA IIC
13. Remote units can be located up to 1 km cable length from the Touchpoint Pro Controller with a maximum round trip of 3 km cable length for the complete system The only connection required between the Controller and Remote units is the network cable The Remote Touchpoint Pro unit can be housed in any of the standard Touchpoint Pro Enclosures a 19 rack or a suitable third party enclosure Touchpoint Pro Controller Remote Touchpoint Pro Unit os Max 1km irs Example Distances between units 0 5 km 0 3 km 1 km 0 7 km 0 4 km Total round trip a a 2 9 km J Remote Touchpoint Pro Unit Remote Touchpoint Pro Unit Remote Touchpoint Pro Unit Fig 2 2 Max allowed cable distances 20 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 2 Overview Introduction 2 4 System Topology Touchpoint Pro can be implemented using a centralised or distributed cabling architecture With a centralised architecture all field devices are cabled back to a central point so called home run In a distributed architecture field devices are clustered with short cable runs to a control unit in this case the Touchpoint Pro Remote unit and a minimal amount of cabling is required back to the central point in this case only the Ring Network cable The only restrictions on a distributed architecture are the maximum round trip distance of 3 km and the maximum distance between two Touchpoint Pr
14. Peak Hold Enable Enabled Enabled Disabled If Peak Hold is enabled and the gas reading rises above the configured full scale value the channel will display the maximum gas reading that has been measured until it is reset Note The number of decimal places to be displayed is determined by the Gas Range Max setting as follows Gas Range Max Decimal Places gt 100 0 gt 10 and lt 99 1 lt 10 2 This is also the resolution at which data will be logged for the trend report 202 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 15 Appendix 2 Configurable Parameter Reference Guide 15 2 6 Suppression Settings Access Level Engineer Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range Comment Zero Suppression Positive 0 0 0 to 25 0 FSD Zero Suppression Negative 0 0 0 to 25 0 FSD The gas concentration shall be set to 0 0 when the gas concentration value received from the sensor is between the Zero suppression Positive and Zero suppression Negative values Note Trend logging takes place when the value of an input channel changes The system will not log values while they remain within the zero suppression limits Note If a threshold alarm level is set within the zero suppression band no alarm signal will be generated 15 2 7 Threshold Alarm 1 Settings Access Level Engineer Paramete
15. e Fora Touchpoint Pro Controller ensure that the screen can be viewed easily and touch screen can be reached A touch screen height of approximately 1 5 m is recommended for comfort e The Touchpoint Pro wall mounted enclosure should be installed only on a vertical surface avoiding sloping surfaces Only use the mounting fixtures supplied with the apparatus and follow installation instructions e The mounting surface should be flat and strong enough to bear the weight of the Touchpoint Pro system Solid brick type construction is recommended Drywall plasterboard dry lined or timber framed type construction is not considered to be a suitable structural material Take account of the contents and external cabling in addition to the weight of the wall mounted enclosure itself check maximum enclosure weights detailed below e If more than one enclosure is to be used ensure that there is sufficient clearance between the enclosures for cable glands mounting cooling door opening etc e It is the installer s responsibility to ensure that the unit temperature does not rise beyond the specified operating limits e Touchpoint Pro conforms to the requirements of European and other standards for EMC and RFI It should not be installed in close proximity to the antennae of high power radio radar and satellite communication equipment or in the vicinity of high voltage switching gear or overhead power lines e All signal cables should be prote
16. 9 10 Ring A Out 11 Drain 12 The ring cable must have the drain wire terminated at the Ring Coupling Module and Control Module drain terminals The ring screen must be connected to the instrument bar at the Ring A Out and Ring B In side of the cable with the clamps provided 64 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 4 Electrical Installation Figure 4 20 Ring screen clamp Remote g Ring B in 7 a Figure 4 21 Ring Network connections and screen earthing 65 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 4 Electrical Installation 4 8 9 System State Relays The System State Relay connections are found at TB4 and TB5 on the Control Module They are rated at 30 Vdc 3 A or 250 Vac 3 A Caution If the System State Relays are being used to switch AC voltages an overcurrent protection device must be included Caution Isolate all incoming supplies before making connections to the System State Relays Note It may be necessary to remove the Control Module Cover to make connections to the Control Module Do not remove any factory fitted earth cabling Terminal System Failure Relay System Fault Relay TB4 TBS 1 SIS_Fail_COM SIS_Fault_COM 2 SIS_Fail_NO SIS_Fault_NO 3 Screen_TB4 Screen_TB5 4 8 10 Power Supply Unit Status Inputs The Power Supply Units Status Input connections can be found at TB8 and TB9 on the Control Module
17. Editing a Configured Channel Note For catalytic bead type detectors the Touchpoint Pro controller is necessary to complete the measuring circuit Therefore all commissioned mV channels remain in Inhibit state until they are calibrated 15 2 1 Commission Channel Access Level Administrator Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range Comment Channel ID Next available 1 to 64 Can only be assigned during first time configuration Otherwise de commission the channel and re assign another channel number Channel Location Tag Channel lt Channel ID gt Maximum 30 30 character location tag name This is the main Alphanumeric Characters channel description used throughout the interface Channel Custom ID Channel lt Channel ID gt Maximum 20 20 character custom ID This is displayed on the Alphanumeric Characters Channel Details screen and in the Configuration Report Note Channel Location Tag and Channel Custom ID only require Engineer level access for editing 15 2 2 Field Device Selection Access Level Administrator Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range Comment Field Device Name Generic Field Device Maximum 30 Alphanumeric If the sensor catalogue is used a list of available field Characters devices will be displayed for selection If copy channel is being used this value cannot be changed Sensor Name Generic Sensor Maximum 30 Alphanumeri
18. Interface Board w o HON Logo w o ventilation TPPR HF R LRMXXX Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board Modbus Interface Board w o HON Logo w o ventilation Without ventilation without plinth without power distribution PPR HF RS LXXHXX Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card w o ventilation w o TPPR HF RS LRXHXX Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board w o ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF RS LXMHXX Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Modbus Interface Board w o ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF RS LRMHXX Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board Modbus Interface Board w o ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF RS LXXXXX Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card w o HON Logo w o ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF RS LRXXXX Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board w o HON Logo w o ventilation w o powe
19. wrevrraF ad B a o Knl vwrVeraFr wr era be nue Proppar i bg K a a po on Active Events KEY Inputs Figure 7 8 Web Server Active Event Navigation Filter 7 3 5 Navigation Extras KEY Yi Extras a Login User is logged in WEES Figure 7 9 Web Server Extras 99 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 7 Normal Operation 7 4 Alarms WARNING High off scale readings may indicate an explosive concentration AVERTISSEMENT Des r sultats d passant consid rablement I chelle peuvent tre indicateurs d une concentration explosive 7 4 1 View active alarms Active alarms can be viewed in three ways 1 From the System Status screen select the flashing red bell Alarm icon 2 From the System Status screen navigation bar select the Active Events icon then the Filter icon and select Alarm from the popup menu a iz e Ta y T puts Select Filter ID location f Gas aS ivaue Figure 7 10 Active Events Screen with filter options 3 From the System Status screen navigation bar select the Inputs icon then the Filter icon and select Alarm from the popup menu The screen will display a list of all input channels with active Alarms starting with the most recent event Unacknowledged alarms will flash acknowledged ones will be solid Note the display will show the channel ID location tag an
20. Channel 4 Notes 1 For all shielded cables shield screen should be connected to Earth tag bar bus bar provided in Touchpoint Pro enclosure 218 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 16 Appendix 3 Wiring Diagrams 16 9 ROM With Internal Auxiliary Supply in NC and NO Configuration Recommended Cable 2 Core Twisted Mesh Type Shielded 1 5mm or 2 5mm ROM Module Roan Channel 1 NC Configuration B oan Channel 2 NC Configuration 24VDC OVDC Roan Channel 3 NO Configuration 24VDC OVDC R LOAD Channel 4 F NO Configuration Notes 1 For all shielded cables shield screen should be connected to Earth tag bar bus bar provided in Touchpoint Pro enclosure 2 Maximum 24Vdc Output Load 1 5A per channel and 1 5A total per module With Overload protection 3 Maximum Relay contact rating 5A 24Vdc and 5A 230Vac resistive loads only 219 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 16 Appendix 3 Wiring Diagrams 16 10 ROM With External Auxiliary Supply in NC and NO Configuration Recommended Cable ROM Module 2 Core Twisted Mesh Type fee Aan External Supply li Shielded 1 5mm or 2 5mm pemn R oi_4 ress Oo _woe Roan Channel 1 ae NC Configuration L m Tri I I I r Q V A 24VDC 17 V Channel 2 NC Configuration 20 Roa l ot ovDC NC Channel 3 Q lt NO Configuration Q V 4 24VDC 23 V Rion o i
21. Default S Custom Y jy viv y viviyv y y TPPR S7 RL R M 3 A c c c c N N N X X H D 160 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 12 Ordering Information 12 3 TPPR V Controllers and Remote Units 1 Touchpoint Pro Controller and Remote Unit Wall Mount 9U and 19 Rack enclosure versions TPPR V 0602 19 Rack 5U Controller includes HMI PCBs SD Card TPPR V 0612 19 Rack 5U Remote Unit w o HMI PCB SD Card TPPR V 0852 Front Panel 5U Controller includes HMI PCBs SD Card Standard Wall Mount enclosure versions TPPR V 1210 Wall Mount Controller 600Hx600Wx300D includes HMI PCBs SD Card with pre drilled mounting plate TPPR V 1215 Wall Mount Remote Unit GOOHX600Wx300D w o HMI PCBs SD Card with pre drilled mounting plate TPPR V 1220 Wall Mount Controller 800Hx600Wx300D includes HMI PCBs SD Card with pre drilled mounting plate TPPR V 1225 Wall Mount Remote Unit 8300Hx600Wx300D w o HMI PCBs SD Card with pre drilled mounting plate TPPR V 1230 Wall Mount Controller 1200Hx800Wx300D includes HMI PCBs SD Card with pre drilled mounting plate Wall Mount Stainless Steel Div2 Zone2 Remote Units TPPR V 1241 Wall Mount Stainless Steel Div2 Zone2 Remote Unit 780Hx510Wx300D w o HMI PCBs SD Card with pre drilled mounting plate Floor Standing Cabinet
22. Details Events Outputs if applicable screen screen screen screen C amp E Test Mode Acknowledged COB FW Update Logged when COB firmware is updated Configuration Backup created Logged after configuration backup file is saved successfully Configuration has changed save Configuration has been modified by Y backup the user and after that Configuration backup has not yet been carried out Configuration changed is Logged when user acknowledges acknowledged this event from menu on local or remote user interface Configuration changed is cleared Logged after configuration backup file is saved successfully Configuration Data Deleted Configuration Error Y All Configuration Error Cleared Configuration Restored Configuration has been restored from a previously saved backup Configuration Settings Test ended Configuration Settings Test Y started Configuration Test Mode Acknowledged Delay Time Active Configured delay for ROM channel vY ROM activation Delay Time Inactive ROM Diagnostic Error Raised when channel runtime Y All diagnostics of IO module fails Diagnostic Error Cleared All DIM Channel Modified DIM DIM Configuration State Inhibit Channel is in Inhibit because the DIM module is being configured DIM Configuration State Inhibit DIM Cleared DIM User Inhibit Channel has been inhibited by the DIM user DIM User Inhibit Cleared DIM Fault Y Y All 232 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Opera
23. Gas Monitoring 30 characters This text is displayed on the System Status screen System Label System 87 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 6 Commissioning 6 13 1 Calibrate touch panel Calibrate the touch panel if the screen is not responding as expected Calibration of the touch panel is located in the Panel Configuration screen If not already logged in login with a valid engineer level user name From the System Status screen select the Extras icon then Global Settings Select Panel Configuration PO Ne ors Select Calibrate Touch Panel and follow the instructions on screen Note If a user is logged out due to inactivity while the system is in the touch panel calibration screen it will not return to the System Status screen Communication via PC Configuration or Web Server software is not possible Complete the touch panel calibration first then the system will automatically navigate to the System Status screen 6 14 Service Contact Settings To set the Help settings If not already logged in login with a valid engineer level user name From the System Status screen select the Extras icon then Global Settings Select Service Contact Settings ge WG IN Fee Update the settings with your local service support contact details 6 15 Back up Configuration Note Engineer access level is required It is recommended to back up the Touchpoint Pro system configuration once it
24. Operating Instructions 9 Problem Solving Category 1 0 channels Fault Problem Cannot clear Auto Inhibit from channel Possible Cause System has exited configuration unexpectedly leaving module in configuration state Remedial Action Go to System Configuration then System Setup Select one channel of the module and select Edit Configuration Close the popup windows and the module will automatically return to Normal state AIM mV channel has not yet been Calibrate the channel For catalytic bead type detectors the Touchpoint Pro controller calibrated is necessary to complete the measuring circuit Therefore all commissioned mV channels remain in Inhibit state until they are calibrated Inhibit Delay is Wait for the Inhibit Delay time to elapse If the Power On Delay or active Fault Recovery Delay is enabled the system will remain in Inhibit for a period defined by the Inhibit Delay Time Please refer to Appendix 2 Configurable Parameter Reference Guide for further details Sensor The Sensor Transmitter may be in a start up Sequence or may Transmitter is signalling Inhibit have been inhibited for maintenance mA input channel There is a discrepancy between the sensor reading and the value displayed by Touchpoint Pro The mA loop requires calibration Touchpoint Pro converts the 4 20 mA signal it receives from the sensor to a gas reading If the discrepancy is significa
25. PCBs SD Card w o HON Logo w o ventilation TPPR HF F LRXXXX Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board w o HON Logo w o ventilation TPPR HF F LXMXXX Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Modbus Interface Board w o HON Logo w o ventilation TPPR HF F LRMXXX Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board Modbus Interface Board w o HON Logo w o ventilation Without ventilation without plinth without power distribution w o power distribution TPPR HF FS LXXHXX Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card w o ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF FS LRXHXX Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board w o ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF FS LXMHXX Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Modbus Interface Board w o ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF FS LRMHXX Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs
26. SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board w o HON Logo TPPR HW M LXMXXX Wall Mount Controller 800Hx600Wx300D includes HMI PCBs SD Card Modbus Interface Board w o HON Logo TPPR HW M LRMXXX Wall Mount Controller 800Hx600Wx300D includes HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board Modbus Interface Board w o HON Logo TPPR HW M RXXHXX Wall Mount Remote Unit 800Hx600Wx300D w o HMI PCBs SD Card TPPR HW M RXXXXX Wall Mount Remote Unit 800Hx600Wx300D w o HMI PCBs SD Card w o HON Logo TPPR H Large Wall Mount Enclosures TPPR HW L LXXHXX Wall Mount Controller 1200Hx800Wx300D includes HMI PCBs SD Card TPPR HW L LRXHXX Wall Mount Controller 1200Hx800Wx300D includes HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board TPPR HW L LXMHXX Wall Mount Controller 1200Hx800Wx300D includes HMI PCBs SD Card Modbus Interface Board TPPR HW L LRMHXX Wall Mount Controller 1200Hx800Wx300D includes HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board Modbus Interface Board TPPR HW L LXXXXX Wall Mount Controller 1200Hx800Wx300D includes HMI PCBs SD Card w o HON Logo TPPR HW L LRXXXX Wall Mount Controller 1200Hx800Wx300D includes HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board w o HON Logo TPPR HW L LXMXXX Wall Mount Controller 1200Hx800Wx300D includes HMI PCBs SD Card Modbus Interface Board w o HON Logo TPPR HW L LRMXXX Wall Mount Controller 1200Hx800Wx300D includes HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board TPPR
27. Summary System 11025 11026 11027 11028 11029 11030 11031 11032 11033 11034 11035 11036 11037 11038 11039 11040 Summary not not not not not not not not not not not not not not not not used used used used used used used used used used used used used used used used System 11041 11042 11043 11044 11045 11046 11047 11048 11049 11050 11051 11052 11053 1054 11055 11056 Summary Safe State Warning not not not not not not not not not not not not not not Summary Summary used used used used used used used used used used used used used used future use System 11057 11058 11059 11060 11061 11062 11063 11064 11065 11066 11067 11068 11069 11070 11071 11072 Summary 186 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 14 Appendix 1 Modbus Option 14 5 Register Allocation for Function 04 Read Input Registers There are three sets of input registers for each channel 1 The analogue signal expressed as a 16 bit signed integer value 2 The analogue signal expressed as a 32 bit floating point value 3 An animation value 14 5 1 Analogue Registers Integer Channel Analogue Value Integer 01 30001 02 30002 64 30064 Note The Integer format is a 16 bit signed integer range 10000 to 10000 in steps of 0 1 FSD 14 5 2 Analogue Registers Float Channel Analogue Value Float Analogue Value Float Register 1 Register
28. Total Maximum loop resistance 27 Q at 360 mA including Sensor Input Range 15 mV to 600 mV Power Consumption Maximum 1 2 W Excluding Sensors Power Dissipation Maximum 3 5 W Connector Coding Analogue Input Module connectors TB1 TB4 have coding keys to avoid incorrect wiring 153 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 10 Specifications 10 6 4 Digital Input Module Description 4 channel Digital Input Module for switched input devices Electrical Connection 4 x two wire Switch Inputs Supply Voltage 18 32 VDC Supplied from Self Enclosed Low Voltage source only Power Consumption 2 8 W maximum no inputs connected Power Dissipation 2 8 W maximum Field Terminals TB1 TB4 Ratings Maximum current of 14 mA through switched input device at 18 32 VDC EOL End Of Line Resistance 10 kQ 0 25 W 1 INL In Line Resistance 2 7 KO 0 25 W 1 Switch Input Device supply Voltage Vs Minimum 15 V Maximum 32 V Switch Input Device supply Current Is Minimum 5 mA for Supervised OC SC Switch ON condition Maximum 14 mA for Unsupervised Switch ON condition Connector Coding Digital Input Module connectors TB1 TB4 have coding keys to avoid incorrect wiring 10 6 5 Relay Output Module Description 4 channel Relay Output Module incorporating 4 single pole change over SPCO relays and
29. test 2 described above select the channel to be tested and select Output Details from the popup menu 113 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 8 Maintenance 14 Press the Menu icon w and select Force from the popup menu The output will now be activated and the result can be verified 15 When ready select the channel again and select Clear Force from the popup menu 16 Repeat steps 13 15 for the next channel 17 When the test is complete return to the System Status screen and select the Extras icon then Diagnostics 18 Press the Menu icon w and select Stop Cause and Effect Test 19 The system will show a confirmation message that it has returned to normal operation WARNING Ensure that the system is returned to normal operation once testing is complete 8 2 Routine maintenance e Visually inspect all cabling e Check for perishing or loose connections e Clean the screen of the Touchpoint Pro Controller with a soft cloth and mild detergent e Check for dust contamination particularly for rack mount units e Periodically exercise the relays to confirm functionality e Check the condition of the enclosure for corrosion deterioration of door seals blocked ventilation seals loose fixings and other damage that could impair the safety and operation of the equipment Caution Do not use solvent to clean any part of the Touchpoint Pro system 8 3 Exercise the relays Note Operator level access
30. w o HON Logo natural ventilation w o power distribution SD Card Redundant Con Forced ventilation without plinth trol Centre Board Modbus Interface Board with 100mm plinth w o HON Logo TPPR HF F LXXHXF Floor Standing Cabin oO with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs D Card forced ventilation TPPR HF F LRXHXF D Card Redundant Con oor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs rol Centre Board forced ventilation TPPR HF F LXMHXF oor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs D Card Modbus Interface Board forced ventilation TPPR HF F LRMHXF oor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs rol Centre Board Modbus Interface Board forced ventilation TPPR HF F LXXXXF D Card w o HON Logo oor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs forced ventilation TPPR HF F LRXXXF D Card Redundant Con oor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs trol Centre Board w o HON Logo forced ventilation TPPR HF F LXMXXF oor Standing Cabin S F S F S F SD Card Redundant Con F S F S F SD Card Modbus In D erface Board w o HON Logo forced ventilation ith Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D in
31. 10 4 7 Backup Batteries Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 10 Specifications Description 2 x 12 V 24 V nominal sealed lead acid batteries Battery type FIAMM 12 V 12 Ah FG21202 or 12 V 27 Ah FG22703 Dimensions 395 mm x 300 mm x 215 mm W x Hx D Weight 15 7 kg 12 Ah 25 kg 27 Ah Operating Temperature 20 C to 45 C Operating Humidity 10 to 90 RH non condensing Storage conditions 20 C to 40 C 10 to 90 RH Storage Lifetime without re charge 18 months at lt 5 C 6 months at 25 C 3 months at 30 C 2 months at 40 C Ingress Protection IP20 NEMA Code 1 Input Voltage charging 25 VDC to 28 VDC UPS Supervised Output Voltage when supplying 20 VDC to 28 VDC dependent on charge level Maximum Input Current 3A Maximum Output Current 20A Environmental Protection Class Equipment Class Ill Installation Cat 2 Pollution Degree 2 Fuse type inline Bussman 20 A Fast Acting Type ABC 20 R 114 x 14 Ceramic Tube Current Limit Protection Double pole circuit breaker Isolator 20 A Maximum Altitude 2000 m 6562 feet 10 4 8 Cabinet DC Fuses All cabinet DC fuses must be UL 248 Special Purpose Fuses complying with ISO 8820 3 2002 E and should have Interrupting Rating 1000 A at 58 VDC Insulation Body UL 94 V0 Heat Resistant Thermoplastic Insulation Cover Cl
32. 2 01 30129 30130 02 30131 30132 64 30255 30256 Note The Float format is a 32 bit floating point value in accordance with IEEE 754 2008 14 5 3 Animation Registers A group of animation values are allocated for registers 30065 to 30128 These are intended to be used by graphics packages for defining the colours of various screen objects based upon the status of a channel A 16 bit unsigned word format is used Channel Animation Register 01 30065 02 30066 64 30128 187 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 14 Appendix 1 Modbus Option The data value for each register can be one of the following Value Status Channel operating normally RATE alarm active LTEL alarm active STEL alarm active A1 alarm active A2 alarm active A3 alarm active Fault active Inhibit active Not used 10 Not used 11 or higher No data available COIN DIO HR J INJ oO 14 6 Register Allocation for Function 03 06 16 Read Write Holding Registers All registers use 16 bit data words The Channel Type field identifies the channel as Input or Output The decimal value 105 ASCII i is used for Inputs the decimal value 111 ASCII o for Outputs The decimal value 6 together with channel ID 0 is used for master commands Function 16 can be used to write to the 40n01 to 40n04 and 41n01 to 41n05 n 0 to 9 ranges of
33. 24 VDC Auxiliary Power Output Electrical Connection 4 x SPCO Relay Terminals TB1 to TB4 4 x two wire Auxiliary Output Terminals TB5 to TB8 Supply Voltage Vs 18 32 VDC Supplied from Self Enclosed Low Voltage source only Auxiliary Supply Voltage Supply Voltage Vs 0 7 V Auxiliary Supply Current aximum 1 5 A Power Consumption aximum 1 5 W excluding auxiliary power consumption Power Dissipation Maximum 2 3 W Relay Contacts TB1 TB4 aximum 5 A through one relay contact at 250 VAC 30 VDC non inductive aximum 8 A total through all four relay contacts at 250 VAC 30 VDC non inductive inimum 12 VDC 10 mA Connector Coding Relay output connectors TB1 TB4 and auxiliary output connectors TB5 TB8 have coding keys to avoid incorrect wiring The relay output connectors TB1 TB4 are coloured black to identify them for AC supply wiring 154 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 11 Certification 11 1 EC declaration of conformity A full EC declaration of conformity is available on the CD accompanying the product This document lists the European Standards with which the Touchpoint Pro complies WARNING Only the combustible gas detection portion of this instrument has been assessed for performance in accordance with the ATEX Directive AVERTISSEMENT Seulement la partie d tection de gaz explosif de ce
34. 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 10 Specifications 10 6 2 Analogue Input Module mA Description 4 channel 4 20 mA Analogue Input Module with two or three wire interface to detector Sensor Configuration 4 x two wire or three wire current sourced from detector Signal Measurement Range 0 25 mA Supply Voltage 18 32 VDC Supplied from Self Enclosed Low Voltage source only Field Device Supply Voltage Supply Voltage Vs 0 7 V Single Channel Field Device Supply current Maximum 1 A Total Field Device supply current Total Maximum current 2 A at 70 C ambient Total Maximum current 4 A at 60 C ambient Power Consumption 0 8 W Excluding sensor supply Power Dissipation Maximum 3 7 W at 4 A total field device load Maximum 2 1 W at 2 A total field device load Sense Resistance 101 Q Connector Coding Analogue Input Module connectors TB1 TB4 have coding keys to avoid incorrect wiring 10 6 3 Analogue Input Module mV Bridge Description 4 channel Analogue Input Module for Catalytic Bridge sensors Electrical Connection 4 x three wire mV Bridge Supply Voltage 18 32 VDC Supplied from Self Enclosed Low Voltage source only Sensor Drive method Constant current Programmable Current Range 180 360 mA Total Maximum loop resistance 40 Q at 200 mA including Sensor Maximum Loop Resistance
35. 4 2 Apply power Check that the DC supply voltage is between 18 and 32 Vdc This can be conveniently checked for example at the Vaux terminals of a Relay Output Module preferably furthest from the power source or at the V and V terminals of an Analogue Input Module The system start up sequence lasts for 3 10 minutes depending on the size of the system When start up is completed Touchpoint Pro will display the System Status screen indicating the current status of the system Note If Analogue Input mV Bridge channels have been configured but not calibrated the channels will be in Inhibit which will be indicated on the System Status screen The Touchpoint Pro Controller System Status Screen is shown below as it appears on the touchscreen interface 75 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 6 Commissioning 4 iz T i Systemstatus Active Events Screen with active events Extras Go to Inputs E I Active Events Screen 99 no active events Figure 6 1 A full explanation of the aspects used in Normal Operation is given in chapter 7 For Commissioning primarily the Login and Extras icons found in the navigation bar at the top of the screen will be used 6 3 Set Date Time and Language Note In the event of power loss the date time and language settings will be retained for 3 days After a longer time interval please check and re program if necessary 1 Lo
36. 42 firmware update failed 47 Firmware could not be applied Please refer to error 42 Please refer to error 42 firmware update failed 48 Configuration restore operation failed Please refer to error 42 Please refer to error 42 49 Input channel cannot be de Touchpoint Pro will not 1 Identify the output channel s that the input commissioned because it is used allow the removal ofan channel is linked to in the C amp E logic Please remove input from the Cause 2 Modify the Cause and Effect matrix for that the input channel first from the and Effect matrix channel to remove the input channel corresponding output channel 3 Retry the de commissioning operation C amp E and retry the de commission operation 50 Invalid calibration status Channel requires 1 Please retry the operation calibration or has 2 If still unsuccessful on the front panel press the not been successfully Accept and Reset buttons together for 10 s which calibrated will restart the COB 3 If the error has not cleared if possible cycle the power to the system 4 If the problem persists please contact your local service representative 136 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 9 Problem Solving Error Message Possible Cause Remedial Action Code 51 Zero gas calibration failed zero The level at which the 1 For a mA channel calibration should always be signal too low channel is tr
37. 48 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 4 Electrical Installation e Instrument Earth is preferred to connect the cable screen e Risk is that screen is connected at both ends earth loops D Three Core Cable with Screen Earthed at Contoller a jiington aoda f Cie Box 1 L Sensor Incoming Client Earth Figure 4 3 Screened cable metal junction box and or sensor e Instrument Earth is preferred to connect the cable screen e Care must be taken to isolate the screen at the junction box e g terminate it in a spare terminal e The metal sensor junction box must be connected to Protective Earth e Risk is that screen is connected at both ends earth loops Armour a a te Da Sa E Nera ee ie Sos Zz Screen Junction Three Core Cable with Screen and Armour with Screen Earthed at Controller Box and Armour Earthed in Field p f Sensor Incoming Client Earth Figure 4 4 Screened cable with armour wire or braid with plastic junction box and plastic sensor e The armour must be connected to Protective Earth at the sensor and the screen should be connected to the enclosure s common earth ground rail e Care must be exercised to prevent contact between cable armour and cable screen and between cable armour and the enclosure in order to prevent ground loops occurring 49 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 4 Electrical Installation Armour S
38. 7 3 Examples of Input Output screens 94 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 7 Normal Operation 7 2 3 Navigation Active Events OO Oxt 2014 042128 SO Cori acg Gi T T a an Adlive Events A T ja Enry LOE o rimestamp P tocacion stars A m lt mee Active Events Waren Filter Figure 7 4 Example of navigating through Active Events Inputs wg a N N A m e gt To login to the system you must have a user name and password Note For details of access levels and permissions please refer to Chapter 5 User Interface Extras Press the Login icon padlock in the navigation bar and a prompt will appear for the User Name and Password User is logged in sjan Once a valid user name and password has been entered the icon in the navigation bar will change to an open padlock indicating that a user is logged in Note After 20 minutes of inactivity the system will always logout the user and return to the System Status screen 95 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 7 Normal Operation 7 3 Overview Web Server Interface The Web Server displays live information from the Touchpoint Pro system With the appropriate access level permissions events can be acknowledged and reset and event history can be analysed Please refer to Chapter 5 User interface Access Levels for details 7 3 1 Start the Web Server To use the Web Server the
39. Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board Modbus Interface Board w o HON Logo natural ventilation Natural ventilation without plinth without power distribution TPPR HF RS LXXHXN Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card natural ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF RS LRXHXN Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board natural ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF RS LXMHXN Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Modbus Interface Board natural ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF RS LRMHXN Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board Modbus Interface Board natural ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF RS LXXXXN Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card w o HON Logo natural ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF RS LRXXXN Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board w o HON Logo natural ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF RS LXMXXN Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Contr
40. Board X None M Modbus Interface Board for TPPR S RL selection only 5 7 or 9 Way Communication Power Rail Select the appropriate option for your PSU and 1 0 module combination Consists of a DIN Rail blank panel 1 Ring Coupling Module and 5 7 or 9 Backplanes 2 5 Way Communication Power Rail select up to maximum 5 I O Modules 3 7 Way Communication Power Rail select up to maximum 7 1 0 Modules 4 9Way Communication Power Rail select up to maximum 9 1 0 Modules Power Configuration Select the Power Supply options and 1 0 configuration needed X None select up to maximum 9 1 0 Modules in any combination A 5A select up to maximum 7 I O Modules in any combination B 10A select up to maximum 7 I O Modules in any combination C 20A select up to maximum 5 1 0 Modules in any combination U 5A UPS select up to maximum 5 1 0 Modules in any combination V 10A UPS select up to maximum 5 I O Modules in any combination Input and Output Module 1 0 module The maximum numbers of I O Modules depend on Communication Power Rail and Power Configuration selection Please include a code for each I O module including X NONE to make a total of 9 codes The rail will be populated in the order given below X None A Analogue Input Module mV Bridge C Analogue Input Module 4 20mA H Digital Input Module N Relay Output Module Customer Logo for Wall Mount 9U Cabinets only Honeywell None Customer Set up D
41. Channel Note When you enter the System Setup menu a configuration timeout is active separate to the user login timeout If no values are sent to the system for 20 minutes you will be logged out of configuration Any changes that have already been sent to the system will be retained but any that have been made on screen but not yet sent to the system will be lost It may be necessary to return to the System Setup screen and set the module to normal state To edit an already configured channel 1 If not already logged in login with a valid administrator level user name From the System Status screen select the Extras icon then System Configuration Re enter the password and press Login Select System Setup OP Qe The screen will show the system setup tree listing of all installed I O modules and Control Centre Board s Press the beside each module to expand and show the four channels of that module Select the required channel press the Menu icon and select Edit Configuration oa O Select the screen that you want to edit refer to the previous sections 9 Enter the required values in the field New Value and press Send 10 The system will return the new value press Accept to confirm 11 If required select another screen to edit otherwise close the menu window 6 9 4 Removing an I O Module It is good engineering practice to remove modules from the software before physically removing them from the Touchpoint Pro even if you c
42. Clear the ring fault from the system 3 Insert the unconfigured or foreign module back in the system and continue with commissioning 131 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 9 Problem Solving Category Fault Problem Possible Cause Remedial Action Web Server No Web Server Check TCP IP settings check if the PC network adapter is enabled connection check that the PC wireless adapter is off before connecting to the Web Server check proper cable connections The Ethernet port of the Touchpoint Pro Control Module should be connected to a network Please refer to cable recommendations chapter 4 Web Server Communication with The Touchpoint Pro Check the Touchpoint Pro Controller touchscreen for any the Controller is lost Controller requires instruction or detailed error message some action to be performed e g system restart restore CCB functionality before normal Web Server communication can resume Web Server Slow intermittent The Web Server Reduce the number of web clients to five or less response from the supports 5 Touchpoint Pro system concurrent web Clients however it does not restrict further users from connecting 9 2 List of Error Codes Note CCB Control Centre Board COB Communication Board UDID Unique Device Identifier Error Message Possible Cause Remedial Action Code 2 Operation failed invalid frame The Control Module 1 Plea
43. Cleared ROM Output Deactive Force Cleared ROM Output Force Cleared ROM Output Verification Error Cleared PC Config SW Login Logged when user logs in from PC PC Config SW Logout Logged when user logs out from PC Peak Hold When actual gas concentration Y A Y mA mV value rises above the configured maximum gas range Peak Hold Active TBC 235 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 20 Appendix 7 Logged events and where they are displayed Displayed we F Specific Event Comment Input Output Active Inputs Channel Type Details Details Events Outputs if applicable screen screen screen screen PSU Channel Modified One of the Status input channels has been modified PSU Decommissioned One of the Status input channels has been removed Pwd for Accept button Disabled Password settings changed by Ul Pwd for Accept button Enabled Password settings changed by Ul Pwd for Reset button Disabled Password settings changed by Ul Pwd for Reset button Enabled Password settings changed by Ul Rate Alarm Y Y Y mA mV Rate Alarm Acknowledged mA mV Rate Alarm Cleared mA mV Redundant CCB active Master Master CCB has failed and the A failed redundant CCB has taken over control of the system Redundant CCB Failure TBC Redundant CCB successfully replaced Relay Output Error TBC ROM Relay Output Err
44. Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board Modbus Interface Board with 100mm plinth w o HON Logo w o ventilation w o power distribution Natural Ventilation and without plinth TPPR HF F LXXHXN oor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs D Card natural ventilation TPPR HF F LRXHXN oor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs D Card Redundant Control Centre Board natural ventilation TPPR HF F LXMHXN oor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs D Card Modbus Interface Board natural ventilation TPPR HF F LRMHXN oor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs TPPR HF F LXXXXN oor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs D Card w o HON Logo natural ventilation TPPR HF F LRXXXN oor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs D Card Redundant Control Centre Board w o HON Logo natural ventilation TPPR HF F LXMXXN oor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs D Card Modbus Interface Board w o HON Logo natural ventilation D F S F S F S F SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board Modbus Interface Board natural ventilation F S F
45. Daten des Servicezentrums Bearbeiten Zugriff auf e Version der momentan installierten e Name des Zentrums Bedienfeld kalibrieren Komponente anzeigen Telefonnummer des Zentrums Best tigen Abbrechen vor Beginn der Aktualisierung Dateiname Software Map 2 2010 vsd LUI SysConfig 224 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 18 Appendix 5 User Interface Software Menu Structure 18 1 3 Navigation Sequence for PC Configuration SW Global Settings under development Help Screen Settings TCP IP Settings Modbus Settings Panel Configuration Regional Settings Legend Screen for Visualisation Screen for PC Config SW Screen for Configuration COB and Touch Panel Settings not for initial release Screen not required for WebServer Local HMI PC Configuration Software 225 MAN0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 18 Appendix 5 User Interface Software Menu Structure 18 1 4 Calibration from the Local User Interface Touchscreen 226 MAN0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 19 Appendix 6 Glossary of Icons 19 1 Icons Meani T screen PC Config leaning Icon Icon About Active User N A uw Active Events Screen no active events Active Events Screen with active events N A N A Add User Back N A CCB Configuration N A CCB Management 3 CCB Re
46. H x W x D 225 x 360 x 70 mm Weight 4 Kg 10 1 2 19 5U Rack Enclosure with User Interface Part Number TPPR V 0602 Material Mild Steel Earthing Points M8 main grounding other M6 Dimensions H x W x D 483 x 222 x 110 mm Weight 12 Kg 144 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 10 Specifications 10 1 3 19 5U Remote Unit Enclosure without User Interface Part Number TPPR V 0612 Material Mild Steel Earthing Points M8 main grounding other M6 Dimensions H x W x D 483 x 222 x 110 mm Weight 6 Kg 10 2 Wall Mounted Enclosures All wall mounted enclosures are Equipment Class 1 grounded and Installation Category 2 and have additional restrictions as shown under each sub heading below A WARNING Protect the User Interface from direct exposure to precipitation and sunlight AVERTISSEMENT Prot ger l interface utilisateur des expositions directes au soleil et de la pluie 10 2 1 Wall Mount Controller Enclosures with User Interface These units are IP 66 Type 4 amp 12 Class 1 grounded and can be installed indoors or outdoors in a Pollution Degree 3 environment that affords total protection from rain snow and direct sunlight The upper T may be reduced dependent on internal power dissipation See Rating Plates for details Part Number TPPR V 1210 TPPR V 1220 TPPR V 1230 Material Mild Stee
47. Mobus Master Host Mobus Master 14 3 Configuration Examples 181 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 14 Appendix 1 Modbus Option Modbus Master normally 120 ohm termination resistance R Slave Node Modbus Master Disconnect 120 ohm termination resistance 14 4 Example Systems Touchpoint Pro can be any one of the slave nodes Alternatively if a different resistance is required for a specific installation do not change the jumper settings but connect a resistor directly between terminals 3 and 4 A OUT and B OUT of TB6 and or TB7 without using the internal termination resistor To connect the termination resistor using the Touchpoint Pro jumpers located on the Bus Interface Board Caution The SD Card any USB device and all cables must be removed before attempting to remove the Control Module cover panel 1 Locate the cover panel of the Control Module 2 Remove all cables 182 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 14 Appendix 1 Modbus Option WARNING SD Memory Card Remove top and bottom Plugs TOP TBS BOTTOM TBS of TB9 TB8 before opening the cover 5 Screen TBS 15 Screen TBS 4 PSU4_Stat2 4 PSU2_Stat2 3 PSU4_Statt 3 PSU2_Stat 7 2 PSU3_Stat2__ 2 PSU1_Stat2 1 PSU3_Stat1 1 PSU1_Stat
48. Module 4 20 mA has the option to use the sensor catalogue basic extended configure a custom channel or copy from a configured channel basic extended Note When making changes using Extended options it is the user s responsibility to determine whether other settings have been affected and to make any corresponding changes If a basic configuration is selected only the first two screens detailed below will be used Commission Channel and Field Device Selection The rest of the configuration will be programmed automatically either from the sensor catalogue or from the channel that is being copied Note If a channel is configured from the sensor catalogue it is possible to edit individual settings afterwards see Section Editing a Configured Channel 15 1 1 Commission Channel Access Level Administrator Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range Comment Channel ID Next available 1 to 64 Can only be assigned during first time configuration Otherwise de commission the channel and re assign another channel number Channel Location Channel lt Channel ID gt Maximum 30 30 character location tag name This is the main Tag Alphanumeric Characters channel description used throughout the interface Channel Custom ID Channel lt Channel ID gt Maximum 20 20 character custom ID This is displayed on the Alphanumeric Characters Channel Details screen and in the Configuration Report
49. PCBs trol Centre Board Modbus Interface Board with 100 mm plinth natural TPPR HF F LXXXPN oor Standing Cabine D Card w o HON Log Ss ith Front Access 2000 with 100mm plinth natural ventilation Hx800Wx600D inc udes Contro er with HMI PCBs TPPR HF F LRXXPN TPPR HF F LXMXPN TPPR HF F LRMXPN F S Floor Standing Cabinet wi SD Card Redundant Con F S oor Standing Cabinet wi Floor Standing Cabine SD Card Redundan natural ventilation Wi ith Front Access 2000 trol Centre Board with ith Front Access 2000 D Card Modbus Interface Board with 100mm plinth w o HON Logo nat th Front Access 2000 Hx800Wx600D 100mm plinth Hx800Wx600D inc inc Hx800Wx600D inc udes Co w o HON Logo udes Co udes Co Control Centre Board Modbus Interface Board with 100 ntro ntro ural ntro HMI PCBs ventilation er with HMI PCBs ventilation er with HMI PCBs mm plinth w o HON Logo er with natural Natural ventilation wit h plinth w o power distribution TPPR HF FS LXXHPN Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card with 100mm plinth natural ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF FS LRXHPN Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes
50. PSU 161 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 12 Ordering Information Communication Power Rail For 19 Rack enclosure versions TPPR V 0520 5 Way Communication Power Rail TPPR V 0525 7 Way Communication Power Rail TPPR V 0530 9 Way Communication Power Rail For standard Wall Mou nt and Floor Standing Cabinet versions TPPR V 0540 10 Way Communication Power Rail TPPR V 0541 9 Way Communication Power Rail with additional RCM TPPR V 0542 9 Way Communication Power Rail with additional DIM TPPR V 0543 8 Way Communication Power Rail with additional DIM and RCM Bus Interface Board TPPR V 2130 Modbus Interface Board Redundant Control System TPPR V 2120 Redundant Control Centre Board Software TPPR V 1111 PC Config SW licences 12 months TPPR V 2223 WebServer SW licences 12 months 3 Touchpoint Pro Accessories and Spares TPPR V 0405 27Ah 24V Battery 2x27Ah 12V in series TPPR V 0406 12Ah 24V Battery 2x12Ah 12V in series TPPR V 2600 Battery Backup Enclosure TPPR V 1050 Ring Coupling Module RCM TPPR V 0842 SD Card TPPR V 0703 DIN Rail Blank Panel 430mm for 19 Rack 5U version TPPR V 0704 DIN Rail Blank Panel 487mm for Standard Cabinet versions TPPR V 0705 DIN Rail Blank Panel 630mm for Standard Cabinet versions TPPR V 0706 DIN Rail Blank Pane
51. Pro Operating Instructions 202 203 203 203 203 204 204 204 205 205 205 206 206 206 207 207 207 208 208 208 209 209 209 210 210 210 211 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 222 223 224 225 226 227 227 229 230 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 1 Safety and Information The Equipment referred to in this manual contains components and assemblies that are each certified for use in a variety of differing environments and it is the site owner s responsibility to confirm the suitability of the equipment prior to its installation and use The Equipment assemblies referred to in this manual are collectively certified for use in a flammable gas detection system only Any other use is not currently certified and is not authorised by the manufacturer For installation in Canada and the USA for both ordinary and hazardous locations all connections cabling overcurrent protection and installations must strictly adhere to both the National Electrical Code NEC and the Canadian Electrical Code CEC Please check the product rating plate and look for the following marks to ensure that the supplied equipment is suitable for its intended location and purpose C Products bearing the CE mark conform to all applicable European Directives as stated on the Honeywell product specific EC Declaration of Conformity amp Products bearing the CSA mark conform to the requi
52. Pro PC Configuration Software on the PC to be used and follow the installation routine Note To install the software correctly it is necessary to run the setup program as an administrator in Windows 7 right click on the setup program and select Run as administrator 5 Connect the Touchpoint Pro unit to the network and launch the PC Configuration Software 6 Enter the IP address of the Touchpoint Pro unit and select Connect 7 The Login screen will appear Enter a valid user name and password f Merr net Figure 6 2 Login Details Dialog The PC Configuration Software follows the same screens as the touchscreen with the exception that several screens are combined together Therefore it is possible to follow through all the instructions in this chapter to configure the Touchpoint Pro system For a detailed navigation and menu structure please refer to the Appendix User Interface Software Menu Structure 80 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 6 Commissioning Moya Figure 6 3 PC Configuration Interface 6 7 Verify Default Configuration and Program Tags Note Read this section ONLY if your system has been programmed by Honeywell Analytics with the default configuration during manufacture Otherwise proceed to section 6 8 If the system has been delivered with a default configuration then all Analogue Input channels mA and mV have been configured This section explains how to verify
53. S F S TPPR HF F LRMXXN Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board Modbus Interface Board w o HON Logo natural ventilation Natural ventilation wit hout plinth without power distribution TPPR HF FS LXXHXN Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card natural ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF FS LRXHXN Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board natural ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF FS LXMHXN Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Modbus Interface Board natural ventilation w o power distribution 166 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 12 Ordering Information TPPR HF FS LRMHXN Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller wit rol Centre Board Modbus Interface Board natural ventilation w o power distri SD Card Redundant Con bution h HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Con w o power distribution TPPR HF FS LXXXXN Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controll
54. Select the required parameters usijng the table below Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range Comment Power Supply Unit Tag PSU 1 Alarm 30 characters PSU 2 Alarm PSU 3 Alarm PSU 4 Alarm Event Type Alarm Alarm Fault Warning Channel Type Normal PSU Ack Global Reset Global Inhibit Global Default State NO for Standard Normally Closed NC NC for Safe Normally Open NO Input Latch Non Latching Non Latching Latching 6 11 Redundant Control Centre Board Configuration To access the Control Centre Board configuration If not already logged in login with a valid administrator level user name From the System Status screen select the Extras icon then System Configuration Re enter the password and press Login BO OO IND see Select CCB Management then CCB Configuration Access Level Administrator Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range Comment CCB Redundancy Single CCB Single CCB Dual CCB Only needs to be changed if a redundant CCB has been Mode added or removed 86 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 6 Commissioning 6 12 Buzzer Activation and Button Password Protection The Touchpoint Pro buzzer can be configured to determine under which conditions it activates There is also a facility to password protect the Accept and Reset buttons on the Touchpoint Pro front panel 1 If not already logged in login with a valid administrator level user name 2 Fro
55. Solving Error Message Possible Cause Remedial Action Code 93 Operation failed module list is The Module list detected Ensure that the correct backup file for the system is mismatching and the Module list in being used Retry the operation Backup file are not the same 94 Operation failed please perform ring Faulty CCB has been First initialise the ring network then try again initialisation first replaced by new CCB and configuration restore has been attempted 95 The username password is incorrect User credential This error applies to a specific user login that is only please try again mismatch permitted from the local touchscreen Try again from the local touchscreen 96 Not used 97 Cannot open session because a A user at the local Wait for the calibration to be completed channel is being calibrated touchscreen is doing calibration when a PC Configuration Software user tries to open a configuration session 98 Cannot start calibration because a Calibration is attempted Close the configuration session and retry calibration configuration session on PC is in while a configuration progress session is in progress 99 Operation failed Brownout Fault Brown out fault low Remedy the fault and then do configuration power supply voltage is set for a module and configuration is attempted for this module channels of module 100 Replace operation cannot be The replacement module Please refer to
56. The PSU Status Inputs are Digital Input channels available for PSU monitoring Alternatively they can be configured to be used as Global Acknowledge Global Reset or Global Inhibit Note It may be necessary to remove the Control Module Cover to make connections to the Control Module Do not remove any factory fitted earth cabling Terminal System Failure Relay System Fault Relay TB8 TBO 1 PSU1_Stat 1 PSU3_Stat 1 2 PSU1_Stat 2 PSU3_Stat 2 3 PSU2_Stat 1 PSU4_Stat 1 4 PSU2_Stat 2 PSU4_Stat 2 5 Screen_TB8 Screen_TB9 66 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 4 Electrical Installation The PSU Status Inputs are supplied with the following configuration PSU Status Input Function 1 PSU DC OK 2 UPS BAT RDY 3 UPS BAT RPL 4 Temperature Sensor Forced Ventilation Only If the UPS or the forced ventilation options are not being used those inputs can be configured by the user to act as Global Acknowledge Global Reset or Global Inhibit 24 Vde 1 0 KQ PSU Status Figure 4 21 PSU Status Input 67 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 5 User Interface 5 1 General System interfaces consist of e Interface software with three ways to access Touchscreen for normal system operation maintenance and configuration Licensed Web Server for remote access to view normal system operation Licensed PC Configuration Software optional f
57. Touchpoint Pro system must be connected to a network please refer to Chapter 6 Commissioning Setup Web Server for details To access the Touchpoint Pro system from a remote PC connected to the same network open a web browser and navigate to http lt IP Address gt where IP address is the address of the Touchpoint Pro system on the network 7 3 2 System Status Screen The System Status screen provides a summary of the status of the Touchpoint Pro system as follows e Green tick system OK all input and output channels are in a Normal state e Red bell one or more input channels is in Alarm e Yellow triangle one or more channels is in Fault e Orange triangle one or more channels is in Inhibit e Grey triangle one or more channels is in Warning 96 MAN0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 7 Normal Operation waeVTTra Figure 7 5 Web Server System Status Screen Figure 7 6 Web Server System Status Screen with Active Events 97 MAN0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 7 Normal Operation 7 3 3 Navigation Inputs and Outputs Screens PEL LLL Baar Wuya LS FEeTTrae System Status screen nuvers EET Inputs Event History GY EG E e z 7 Figure 7 7 Web Server Input and Output Screen Navigation 98 MAN0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 7 Normal Operation 7 3 4 Navigation Active Events
58. Y Y Y Y Help Y Y Y Y Service Contact Y Y Y Y About Y y Y Y Report Y y Y y Diagnostics No Y Y N N Screen Name Web Administrator Maintenance Operator View Engineer Global Settings No Y Y N N Service Contact Settings No Y Y N N TCP IP Settings No Y Y N N Modbus Settings No Y Y N N Panel Configuration No Y Y N N Regional Settings No y Y N N Software Update No Y y N N Sensor Catalogue Update No Y Y N N 69 Operating Instructions MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 5 User Interface System Configuration 0 Y Y N N Channel Name Settings 0 Y Y N N View Channel Configuration 0 Y Y N N CCB Management 0 Y N N N CCB Configuration 0 Y N N N User Management No Y Y N N System Setup 0 Y Y N N Channel Pop Up 0 Y N N Channel Source Data 0 Y N N Commission Channel 0 Y N N Decommission Channel Pop Up No Y N N Module Pop Up No Y N N Commission Module No Y N N Replace Module No Y N N N Replace Module Pop Up No Y N N N Remove Module Pop Up No Y N N Network Scan Pop Up No Y N N Field Device Selection No Y N N Sensor Settings No Y N N Range Settings No Y N N Display Settings No Y N N Suppression Settings No y N N N Threshold Alarm 1 Settings No Y Y N N Threshold Alarm 2 Settings No Y Y N N Threshold Alarm 3 Settings No Y Y N N Threshold Alarm Hysteresis No Y Y N N STEL Alarm Settings No Y Y N N Screen
59. Z Wall Mount Remote Unit Stainless Steel Div2 Zone2 TP PR Z Div2Z2 SM H Wall Mount Remote Unit Stainless Steel Div2 Zone2 780Hx510Wx300D w o HMI PCBs SD Card 9 Way Communication Power Rail TP PR Z Div2Z2 SM X Wall Mount Remote Unit Stainless Steel Div2 Zone2 780Hx510Wx300D w o HMI PCBs SD Card w o HON Logo 9 Way Communication Power Rail TPPR H Floor Standing Cabinets TPPR H Floor Standing Cabinets Front Access Without ventilation without plinth SD Card Redundant Con 164 TPPR HF F LXXHXX Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card w o ventilation TPPR HF F LRXHXX Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board w o ventilation TPPR HF F LXMHXX Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Modbus Interface Board w o ventilation TPPR HF F LRMHXX Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs rol Centre Board Modbus Interface Board w o ventilation MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 12 Ordering Information PPR HF F LXXXXX Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI
60. a label attached to each major component i e Controller Remote and Battery Box For Certification and Information purposes an overview is given in the tables in Chapter 10 Specifications Note 1 The Touchpoint Pro system contains a number of COTS items that are have been certified by their manufacturers and their certified parameters have been incorporated into these tables Note 2 OEMs are responsible for ensuring that their systems are certified in accordance with these tables and any 3rd party requirements Note 3 Power Supply Fluctuations are not to exceed DC 18 32 V SELV Supply or 10 of nominal Note 4 All equipment in this manual is rated to 2000 m 6562 ft altitude maximum WARNING Ambient temperature Dependent on components fitted check individual rating plates AVERTISSEMENT Temp rature ambiante elle d pend des composants assembl s v rifier individuellement les plages de temp rature 157 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 12 Ordering Information Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 12 1 TPPR M Input and Output Configurator I O Configurator Part Number Description TPPR M Input and Output Configurator 1 0 Configurator TPPR M 10 Way Communication Power Rail Select up to maximum 10 1 0s Consists of a DIN Rail blank panel 1 Ring Coupling Module and 10 Backplanes Input and Output Modules 1 0 Module X None Analogue Input Module mV Bridge A
61. and immediately insert a replacement card Note Touchpoint Pro has a temporary internal memory so no data is lost during card replacement 4 Return to the Extras screen and select SD Card again Confirm that the SD Card shows status Inserted and usage below 80 8 9 Calibrate mV input channels Catalytic sensors should be calibrated periodically according to the manufacturer s recommendations Note Engineer level access is required Note If you wish to enable a calibration reminder for the channel please edit this setting before starting calibration see Commissioning Editing a Configured Channel and Configurable Parameter Reference Guide Calibration Reminder Settings Touchpoint Pro tracks and monitors the ageing of catalytic bead detectors and can provide a warning when a sensor should be replaced Select First Span when calibrating a new or replacement sensor for the first time and Span for all calibrations thereafter When the sensitivity of the sensor has dropped below 50 of the original value a Sensor Lifetime Expired warning will be generated Caution If First Span is not used the system will compare the sensitivity of the sensor to the default value of 50 mV This may result in the Sensor Lifetime Expired warning being generated prematurely or not at all To calibrate a mV input channel please follow the procedure below in combination with the relevant instructions in the sensor manual 123 MAN09
62. appropriately rated and approved 44 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 4 Electrical Installation 4 2 2 DC Power Input Caution External DC Power input if used must conform to the Input Supply Voltage specification given in Chapter 10 and must not be located inside the Touchpoint Pro wall mounted enclosure The voltage supply requires an overcurrent protection rated in accordance with the rating plate on the specific system The supply must be able to be isolated by means of a switch or circuit breaker which must be suitably located easily reached and clearly marked as the Touchpoint Pro disconnect device The wiring used between the isolator and Touchpoint Pro must be appropriately rated and approved Ensure that the power supply is able to maintain sufficient voltage level for the connected field devices 4 2 3 DC Power Output Touchpoint Pro power output can be adjusted to between 24 Vdc and 28 Vdc default 24 Vdc Touchpoint Pro power supplies include a DC OK relay which is closed when the output voltage reaches the adjusted output voltage level and opens when the output voltage dips more than 10 below the adjusted output voltage level The DC OK Relay has a maximum rating of 60 Vdc 0 3 A 30 Vdc 1 A or 30 Vac 0 5 A resistive load and a minimum permissible load of 1 mA at 5 Vdc Note If the UPS Module with battery backup option is being used ensure that the power supply is adjusted to a
63. assistance 6 6 Setup PC Configuration Software optional Note Engineer level access is required To connect a PC to Touchpoint Pro via the Ethernet port the TCP IP settings in the Touchpoint Pro and the PC must be configured appropriately Note PC Screen Resolution is limited to 1024 x 768 Other resolutions may show a grey patch which does not affect the software operation Ping service should not be turned off ports should not be disabled Pop ups should be allowed and or Touchpoint Pro should be white listed 79 MAN0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 6 Commissioning To access the TCP IP settings 1 On the Touchpoint Pro Controller touchscreen from the System Status screen select the Extras icon then Global Settings Select TCP IP Settings to display the current values Select Edit to change the values as appropriate to match the PC being used Note If the Subnet Mask is set to 255 255 0 0 this means that the first two bytes of the IP Address must match both in the controller and the device that is trying to connect to it For example if the controller IP Address is set to 192 168 1 2 it can connect to another device or network that has an IP Address of 192 168 xxx xxx where xxx can be any whole number between 0 and 255 inclusive If the Subnet Mask is set to 255 255 255 0 the first three bytes of the IP Address must match both in the controller and the PC 4 Install the Touchpoint
64. at 250 VAC 30 VDC non inductive 5 7 inch 320 x 240 pixels QVGA Touch Screen LCD LED and Button Panel with LEDs for Power Alarm and Fault indication Buttons for Accept and Reset functions Buzzer for audio indication of Alarm Faults Sound Level 85 dB at 100 mm Interfaces USB 2 0 Device Interface with standard Type B USB connector to interface with PC Laptop for configuration Supports USB memory device up to 32 Gb Standard SD Card Interface 4 Gb to 32 Gb Supports 24 mm x 32 mm x 2 1 mm cards 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Interface with standard RU 45 connector Two x RS 485 Modbus connections supporting maximum 115 2 kbps Panel Dimension 483 mm x 222 mm Retention of Real Time Clock 24 hours unpowered 10 6 I O Modules 10 6 1 Common Specifications Dimensions 35 0 mm x 99 5 mm x 114 5 mm W x H x D Installation 5 7 9 or 10 way Communication Power Rail Maximum wire size 2 5 mm IP Rating IP20 EMC EN 50270 Power supply 18 32 VDC Supplied from Self Enclosed Low Voltage source only DIN rail compatibility TS 35 15 Casing material Polyamide PA 6 6 VO UL94 Operating Temperature Range 40 C to 70 C Storage Conditions 40 C to 70 C Operating Humidity Range 10 to 90 RH non condensing Weight 210g Environmental Protection Class Equipment Class Ill Installation Cat 2 Pollution Degree 2 152 MANO0923_Issue
65. batteries fuses normal wear and tear or damage caused by accident abuse improper installation unauthorized use modification or repair ambient environment poisons contaminants or abnormal operating conditions This warranty does not apply to sensors or components that are covered under separate warranties or to any 3rd party cables and components Honeywell Analytics financial liability under this warranty shall not exceed the original net purchase price In no event shall Honeywell Analytics be liable for any damages or injury of any nature or kind no matter how caused that arise from incorrect handling or use of this equipment In no event shall Honeywell Analytics be liable for any equipment malfunction or damages whatsoever including without limitation incidental direct indirect special and consequential damages damages for loss of business profits business interruption loss of business information or other pecuniary loss resulting from the incorrect installation or use of this equipment Any claim under the Honeywell Analytics Product Warranty must be made within the warranty period and as soon as reasonably practicable after a defect is discovered Please contact your local Honeywell Analytics Service representative to register your claim This is a summary For full warranty terms please refer to the Honeywell Analytics General Statement of Limited Product Warranty which is available on request 176 MANO0
66. be used to remotely reset inhibit or acknowledge the selected channels When used for inhibit repeated activation toggles the inhibit state of the selected channels Terminal Identification Label Channel 1 Input 1 2 3 4 4 Input 2 5 6 z 7 Input 3 8 9 10 Input 4 11 12 61 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 4 Electrical Installation SWITCH Reor i 10 KO SWITCH 759 i 0 Vdc Figure 4 16 Unsupervised configuration Figure 4 17 Supervised for open circuit configuration eae TEER onos 24 Vdc Rin 2 7 KQ SWITCH Figure 4 18 Supervised for open and short circuit configuration 4 8 7 Relay Output Module Note Channel wiring is from left to right for terminals on the top and bottom of the module It is not possible to move a plug from top to bottom of a module after wiring Please ensure correct wiring by system verification tests See Commissioning First Time Switch On and Maintenance Testing the Touchpoint Pro System The Relay Output Module ROM provides relay outputs to switch field devices such as sounders beacons and actuators In addition an auxiliary voltage supply is available to provide power to such devices The relay contacts have a recommended range of application gt 12 Vdc 10 mA The maximum contact current rating is 5 A per channel with the additional limitation that the maximum contact cur
67. calibration Must be less than the Maximum Span Gas sensor range Conc Default Span Gas Conc 50 FSD According to sensor Sets the Default Span Gas Concentration to be used during range calibration 206 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 15 Appendix 2 Configurable Parameter Reference Guide 15 3 Digital Input Module The Digital Input Module has the option to configure a custom channel or copy from a configured channel Note The Digital Input will be treated as an alarm unless one of the Remote Interaction Settings is enabled Note If a channel is configured by copying from another channel it is possible to edit individual settings afterwards see Section Editing a Configured Channel 15 3 1 Commission Channel Access Level Administrator Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range Comment Channel ID Next available 1 to 64 Can only be assigned during first time configuration Otherwise de commission the channel and re assign another channel number Channel Location Tag Channel lt Channel ID gt Maximum 30 30 character location tag name This is the main Alphanumeric Characters channel description used throughout the interface Channel Custom ID Channel lt Channel ID gt Maximum 20 20 character custom ID This is displayed on the Alphanumeric Characters Channel Details screen and in the Configuration Report Note Channel Location Tag
68. door 73 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 5 User Interface PN WARNING SD Memory Card Remove top and bottom Plugs TOP TSS BOTON THE of TB9 TB8 before opening the cover s Screen TEs 5 Screen TBS 4 PSU4_Stat2 4 PSU2_Stat2 3 PSU4_Stat1 3 PSU2_Stat1 2 PSU3_Stat2 2 PSU1_Stat2 1 PSU3_Stat1 1 PSU1_Stat1 System Label Interfaces Ethernet Product Label USB HOST Power Supply Ring Network System State Relays RS 485 Interface 1 RS 485 Interface 2 USB TBI TB2 TBS TB4 TBS TBS TE7 DEVICE 1 2 11213 4 5 2 3 4 5 1 3 1 2 3 12 3 45 1 2 3 4 5 g B lols 8 2 Made in r o ylh o 22E s 8 m XX g e l la fe Sle lzlz E TEs EEs zz Bla z 3 Blo 3 2 2 2 2 5 2 2 2 2 5 alal alal E a ONS 22o zjx a la Ja fe jz S 5 a a alae zjajz alo aeea Figure 5 1 Control Module cover Note Please read the chapter User Interface before proceeding 74 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 6 Commissioning 6 1 Introduction This chapter explains several operations that may be required during commissioning Users should complete the First Time Switch On Set Date Time and Language Program Users and Password
69. for the exact equipment to be installed and or operated If in doubt contact Honeywell Analytics for advice The following types of notices are used throughout this Operating Manual WARNINGS Identifies a hazardous or unsafe practice which could result in severe injury or death to personnel Caution Identifies a hazardous or unsafe practice which could result in minor injury to personnel or product or property damage Note Identifies useful additional information Disclaimer Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of this document however Life Safety Distribution AG can assume no responsibility for any errors or omissions in this document or their consequences Life Safety Distribution AG would greatly appreciate being informed of any errors or omissions that may be found in the content of this document For information not covered in this document or if there is a requirement to send comments corrections about this document please contact Life Safety Distribution AG using the contact details given on the last page Life Safety Distribution AG reserve the right to change or revise the information supplied in this document without notice and without obligation to notify any person or organization of such revision or change If information is required that does not appear in this document contact the local distributor agent or Life Safety Distribution AG MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructio
70. has risen by 10 LEL within 5 s The rate alarm is calculated from the displayed reading Note If zero suppression is used it has the effect of sensitizing the rate alarm It is recommended to set the rate alarm to twice the suppression band value to avoid nuisance alarms Access Level Engineer Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range Rate Alarm Enable Disabled Enable Disable Rate Alarm Level 5 FSD According to sensor range Rate Alarm Trigger Rising Rising Falling Rate Alarm Latch Latching Non Latching Latching 15 1 14 Rate Alarm Settings 2 Access Level Engineer Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range Comment Rate Alarm Time Interval 1s 1sto30s Determines the Rate Alarm evaluation interval 196 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 15 Appendix 2 Configurable Parameter Reference Guide 15 1 15 Inhibit Delay Settings Access Level Engineer Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range Comment Power On Delay Enable Enabled Enabled Disabled f enabled the channel will be inhibited for a specific time interval the Inhibit Delay Time after power up in order to prevent false alarms e g during sensor warm up Fault Recovery Delay Enable Enabled Enabled Disabled f enabled the channel will be inhibited for a specific time interval the Inhibit Delay Time after a channel fault condi
71. is required to Force a channel Engineer level access is required to Clear Force Caution Disable any operations or actions that may result from relay activation before starting this test Relay output channels can be tested by forcing the relays to an active state If not already logged in login with a valid engineer level user name From the System Status screen select the Inputs icon then the Outputs icon Select the channel to be tested and select Force from the popup menu When ready select the channel again and select Clear Force from the popup menu Oly oe Ne a Repeat steps 3 and 4 for all relay output channels 114 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 8 Maintenance 8 4 How to replace a faulty I O module A faulty I O module can be replaced with another of the same type without needing to re program the configuration Touchpoint Pro will automatically copy over the configuration to the new module WARNING If the relays are switching mains voltages hazardous live terminals may be present within the Relay Output Module even if the Touchpoint Pro system is isolated Caution When installing or replacing an I O module avoid static discharge Note Administrator level access is required Note The new module must be the same type as the old module 1 Disconnect the field equipment from the faulty module by unplugging the field terminals 2 Remove the faulty module from the Communication Pow
72. is supplied to enable the panel to be neatly mounted in an enclosure Figure 3 14 Bezel Mounting Kit 38 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 3 Mechanical Installation 3 7 Touchpoint Pro Battery Box Note the following safety symbols are used on or within the Touchpoint Pro Battery Box HoA AGO Keep away from No naked Flames Warning Warning Read Instructions Wear Eye Protection Children Electric Shock 3 7 1 Siting considerations When choosing a location for the Touchpoint Pro Battery Box consider the following e The Touchpoint Pro Battery Box is specified for operation in ambient temperatures from 20 C to 45 C Operation of the unit outside of this temperature range invalidates the warranty and certification e The Touchpoint Pro Battery Box must be installed in a Pollution Degree 2 environment as defined by IEC 61010 1 CSA C22 2 No 61010 ANSI ISA 61010 1 82 02 01 i e an environment such as an office or control room e The Touchpoint Pro Battery Box is designed for permanent connection to the Touchpoint Pro System UPS for continuous operation The maximum cable length between the Touchpoint Pro Battery Box and the Touchpoint Pro System UPS is 5 m Wire size must be 4 mm e The Touchpoint Pro Battery Box should be installed only on a vertical surface avoiding sloping surfaces Only use the mounting brackets supplied with the apparatus and follow installation instructions e The mounti
73. module in a faulty state will appear in the System Setup Tree Highlight the old module which has been removed and select Replace Module from the popup menu A list of compatible modules will be shown including the newly added module Select the new module and a confirmation screen will be shown Select Replace to proceed The configuration information will be automatically loaded into the new module Note This procedure should only be done to remove a faulty module from the system The removed module cannot be used in another system unless its state is set back to Unconfigured Note A new AIM mV module will require calibration 118 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 8 Maintenance 8 5 How to add a new I O Module The Touchpoint Pro system can easily be expanded by adding new I O modules Caution When installing or replacing an I O module avoid static discharge Note Administrator level access is required Note A module which has previously been configured in one system cannot be added to another system unless it was correctly removed from the original system s configuration 1 Fit anew module of the required type to an empty slot on the Communication Power Rail e Ensure that the module is the correct way up with the label towards you e Hold the module at an angle with the plastic side top closest to the DIN rail e Hook the plastic side on to the edge of the DIN rail Figure 8 4 Attac
74. parts of the system Suitable respiratory eye and skin protection should be worn when servicing these items Stringent industrial hygiene precautions should also be taken Do not allow non essential personnel into the work area gt om gt PEP The Touchpoint Pro system and or its sensors may become contaminated by the ambient environment in which it or they are used It is the Customer s sole responsibility to ensure that all appropriate safety precautions are taken before handling any components or transferring them to any other party MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 1 Safety and Information Warning Eye Hazard The Touchpoint Pro system contains sealed lead acid batteries that may pose an eye hazard if the batteries have become damaged or pressurised Always wear suitable eye protection when handling the UPS or batteries or when clearing up chemical spills Caution Corrosive This equipment contains batteries containing corrosive substances that may pose a health or environmental hazard if improperly handled or carelessly disposed of fa x Caution Health and Environmental Hazards This equipment contains a number of potentially toxic substances that may pose a health or environmental hazard if exposed to very high temperatures VOCs or corrosives or if improperly handled or carelessly disposed of Caution Risk of Permanent Eye and body Damage Always wear suitable eye
75. protection and PPE when installing or removing the Touchpoint Pro system or any of its components Caution Risk of Injury and Damage Touchpoint Pro enclosures are heavy and may become unstable when moved Always wear PPE and ensure that mechanical means and sufficient personnel are available to assist when moving or handling these items PO Please contact your Honeywell authorised representative if you need further advice on any of the above MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 1 Safety and Information 1 3 Location and Description of Warning Labels 1 3 1 Safety Warning Labels Warning labels are mounted in specified locations on the equipment This is to indicate conditions under which the user could be subjected to electrical hazards Figure 1 International Warning Label Figure 2 Warning Label Figure 3 Protective Earth Ground Point Figure 4 Equipment Earth Ground Point This Protective Earth Ground Location Point This Equipment Earth Ground Location Point label is used inside the system and is not normally label is used inside the system and is not normally visible to the operator visible to the operator MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 1 Safety and Information 1 3 2 Equipment Rating Labels Hazardous Locations The following labels are fixed in prominent positions on the enclosure and on relevant modules It is the user s resp
76. refer to error 2 Please refer to error 2 7 Operation failed invalid request type Please refer to error 2 Please refer to error 2 8 Operation failed invalid command Please refer to error 2 Please refer to error 2 code Can also occur due to non compatible COB Software and CCB Firmware versions 9 Operation failed invalid object type Please refer to error 2 Please refer to error 2 10 Operation failed invalid object Please refer to error 2 Please refer to error 2 identifier 11 Operation failed invalid parameter Please refer to error 2 Please refer to error 2 identifier Can also occur due to non compatible COB Software and CCB Firmware versions 12 Operation failed wrong parameter Please refer to error 2 Please refer to error 2 identifier Can also occur due to non compatible COB Software and CCB Firmware versions 13 Operation failed parameter is read Please refer to error 2 Please refer to error 2 only 14 Login session has expired or has A user login will time 1 Check if another user is logged in been ended by another user out after 20 minutes 2 If your requirement takes priority you have the of inactivity or another option to terminate the existing other user s session user may be logged in via one of the alternative interfaces local touchscreen or PC Configuration Software 15 Operation failed invalid transaction Please refer to error 2 Please refer to error 2 identifier 16 Flash memory write operation faile
77. registers only Caution When using Function 6 or Function 16 ensure that the registers related to the command are completely filled before setting the Block Active flag otherwise an unintended command may be performed 14 6 1 Query Poll Registers Query Poll Block Block Active Channel Type Channel ID Query Type Result Result String 1 40001 40002 40003 40004 40005 40006 to 40036 2 40101 40102 40103 40104 40105 40106 to 40136 3 40201 40202 40203 40204 40205 40206 to 40236 4 40301 40302 40303 40304 40305 40306 to 40336 5 40401 40402 40403 40404 40405 40406 to 40436 6 40501 40502 40503 40504 40505 40506 to 40536 7 40601 40602 40603 40604 40605 40606 to 40636 8 40701 40702 40703 40704 40705 40706 to 40736 9 40801 40802 40803 40804 40805 40806 to 40836 10 40901 40902 40903 40904 40905 40906 to 40936 188 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 14 Appendix 1 Modbus Option Allowed values for the Result register 40n05 n 0 to 9 Value Meaning 0 SUCCESS 1 Command not permitted 2 Inter process communication failure 67 Failure 14 6 2 Query Types available Poll No Description Response Format 02 Read System Label B 39 Read Alarm 1 level A 40 Read Alarm 2 level A 41 Read Alarm 3 level A 42 Read STEL level A 43 Read LTEL level A 44 Read Rate level A 102 Read Gas Name B 103 Read Cha
78. risk of injury Refer to local safety regulations 39 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 3 Mechanical Installation Caution Do not block the vents The dimensions of the Touchpoint Pro Battery Box and mounting points are shown below 40 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 3 Mechanical Installation Insert mounting brackets into mounting points Tighten the M6 bolts to a torque of 6 Nm Select a suitable mounting position taking into account the siting considerations above Mark and drill four holes corresponding to the mounting hole positions e o Ne oe Secure the Battery Box enclosure in place The mounting holes are 10 mm in diameter Fixing bolts should be minimum diameter 8 mm to a depth of minimum 50 mm Caution It is the installer s responsibility to select the appropriate fixings taking into account the structure of the mounting surface and the weight of the enclosure 3 7 3 Touchpoint Pro Battery Box Assembly Identify all required parts as follows e Two batteries 12 Ah size small or 27 Ah size large e Connecting cable and fuse assembly e Kit of lugs nuts bolts and washers used with large batteries only WARNING When handling the batteries take great care not to connect the terminals together e g by a tool such as a screwdriver 1
79. routed near sources of electrical noise Check for earth loops Ensure that the bus is correctly terminated If this is the case remove the bus terminators and retry communication Consider adding network bias resistors If possible use an oscilloscope to examine the signals on the highway and take appropriate corrective action 130 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 9 Problem Solving Category Fault Problem Possible Cause Remedial Action Modbus No response from Check the address parameter used in requests issued by the Touchpoint Pro host computer system matches the address allocated to the slave node In multi drop systems check that all nodes have a unique address Module Module is still Module has not Follow the instructions to remove a module from the system see configuration showing as present been properly Maintenance How to Remove or Decommission an I O Module and available for removed from the configuration in the system System Setup PC Configuration No PC Configuration Check IP settings check proper cable connections The PC should SW connection be connected to the Ethernet port of the Touchpoint Pro Control Module System System does not start Check power supply wiring check fuses Check RCD and UPS Battery Backup if fitted System Ring communication Check the Active Events screen for details of the location of the faults observed connection break or
80. section Maintenance Replacing an 1 0 performed no free I O Modules has not been detected Module for the full procedure available Please add a compatible on the network 1 0 Module and initialize the ring network again 101 Ring initialisation has failed Ring Network 1 Power cycle the Touchpoint Pro system Please cycle the power to the system Initialisation has failed 2 Return to the System Setup screen and retry the Ring Initialisation operation 102 Initialisation timeout has occurred An internal system Power cycle the Touchpoint Pro system Please cycle the power to the timeout has occurred Touchpoint Pro system 103 Not used 141 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 9 Problem Solving Error Message Possible Cause Remedial Action Code 104 Operation failed response result Internal communication 1 Please retry the operation failure error 2 If still unsuccessful on the front panel press the Accept and Reset buttons together for 10 s which will restart the COB 3 If the error has not cleared if possible cycle the power to the system 4 If the problem persists please contact your local service representative 105 Operation failed response timeout Please refer to error 104 Please refer to error 104 106 Operation failed CRC error Please refer to error 104 Please refer to error 104 107 Operation failed session expired A user login
81. status bar 6 5 1 TCP IP Settings Note Ping service should not be turned off ports should not be disabled Pop ups should be allowed and or Touchpoint Pro should be white listed To access the TCP IP settings From the System Status screen select the Extras icon then Global Settings Select TCP IP Settings to display the current values Select Edit to change the values as appropriate to the network Pee Nee To access the Web Server from a remote PC connected to the network navigate to https lt IP Address gt Note The Web Server can only be accessed after the Touchpoint Pro system has completed its start up sequence Note If the Subnet Mask is set to 255 255 0 0 this means that the first two bytes of the IP Address must match both in the controller and the device that is trying to connect to it For example if the controller IP Address is set to 192 168 1 2 it can connect to another device or network that has an IP Address of 192 168 xxx yyy where xxx can be any whole number between 0 and 255 inclusive and yyy can be whole number between 1 and 254 inclusive 78 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 6 Commissioning 6 5 2 Internet Explorer Settings To avoid any issues with file downloads it is necessary to configure some of the Internet Explorer settings on the PC that is being used Open Internet Explorer Select Tools gt Internet Options gt Security gt Local Intrane
82. to Earth tag bar bus bar provided in Touchpoint Pro enclosure 2 A separate enclosure provision should be considered for mounting of external power supply and its field wiring 214 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 16 Appendix 3 Wiring Diagrams 16 5 DIM in Unsupervised Configuration Recommended Cable 2 Core Twisted Mesh Type Shielded 1 5mm or 2 5mm DIM Module 24VDC Switch Channel 1 1 075 KQ OVDC O A 24VDC 4 Switch bs Channel 2 6 l 1 075 KQ OVDC m m u l 1 Li 1 i I p O 4 24VDC 7 Switch ds Channel 3 1 075 KQ OVDC Sse a O A 24VDC 10 Switch i 1 12 Channel 4 1 075 KQ OVDC L Notes 1 For all shielded cables shield screen should be connected to Earth tag bar bus bar provided in Touchpoint Pro enclosure 2 Switch can be manually operated push button or potential free contact 3 Maximum current through closed contact limited to 15mA 215 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 16 Appendix 3 Wiring Diagrams 16 6 DIM in Supervised Open Circuit Configuration Recommended Cable 2 Core Twisted Mesh Type Shielded 1 5mm or 2 5mm DIM Module Switch Channel 1 1 075 KQ OVDC 24VDC Switch Channel 2 1 075 KQ OVDC 24VDC Switch Channel 3 1 075 KQ OVDC 24VDC Switch Channel 4 1 075 KQ OVDC Notes 1 For all shielded cables
83. with Floor Standing Cabinet w SD Card Redundan power distribution Con ith Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D i h cludes Control 100mm plinth cludes Control 100mm plinth natural ventilation w o power distribution cludes Control rol Centre Board with 100mm plinth w o HON Logo natural ventilation w o er with HM Natural ventilation w o er with HM er with HM PCBs SD Card PCBs SD Card PCBs TPPR HF RS LXMXPN Floor Standing Cabinet w Modbus Interface Board ith Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card with 100mm plinth w o HON Logo natural ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF RS LRMXPN Floor Standing Cabinet wi ventilation w o power distribution ith Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board Modbus Interface Board with 100mm plinth w o HON Logo natural Forced ventilation without plinth Redundant Control Centre Board Modbus Interface Board w o HON Logo forced ventilati TPPR HF R LXXHXF Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card forced ventilation TPPR HF R LRXHXF Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board forced ventilation TPPR HF R LXMHXF Floo
84. 00 WM steel enclosure 28 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 3 Mechanical Installation 3 2 1 Small Wall Mounted Enclosure Mild Steel The dimensions of the small wall mounted unit Controller or Remote are shown below all dimensions in mm R4 5 TYP R7 5 TYP Dead Lo O 2 3 amp pits ri 3 560 a A 600 ma i Figure 3 2 Touchpoint Pro Small Wall Mounted Enclosure Mild Steel 3 2 2 Medium Wall Mounted Enclosure Mild Steel The dimensions of the medium wall mounted unit Controller or Remote are shown below all dimensions in mm R4 5 TYP ar R7 5 TYP 0 tel So 228 eee o H 881 845 800 D 560 300 600 388 Figure 3 3 Touchpoint Pro Medium Wall Mounted Enclosure Mild Steel 29 L w MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 3 Mechanical Installation 3 2 3 Large Wall Mounted Enclosure Mild Steel The dimensions of the large wall mounted unit Controller or Remote are shown below all dimensions in mm _ _ ____ 4 1281 1251 1200 N i EE Boe U e 760 e 314 800 rme 38 Figure 3 4 Touchpoint Pro Large Wall Mounted Enclosure Mild Steel 30 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoi
85. 05 Caution Batteries must be replaced as a pair 128 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 9 Problem Solving This section explains how to deal with problems that may be encountered when using Touchpoint Pro If a problem persists please contact Honeywell Analytics for advice using the contact details given on the last page of this manual 9 1 Troubleshooting touchscreen Category Fault Problem Possible Cause Remedial Action User Interface Lost Admin password User error A Honeywell authorised engineer can rescue a locked out touchscreen Administrator but this requires an on site Service call and installation of a special token and one time pass phrase User Interface Screen has locked up Internal On the front panel press the Accept and Reset buttons together communication issue for 10 s which will restart the Communication Board User Interface touchscreen Screen does not work as expected Screen calibration Calibrate the touchscreen To do this 1 Login 2 Select Extras gt Global Settings gt Panel Configuration gt Calibrate Touch Panel 3 Follow the instructions using a stylus or similar 4 When done use the Back button to exit Note You may get a fault light if you leave the touchscreen calibration selected and unused for a period of time Continue with the calibration to clear the fault User Interface Web browser already Open erro
86. 1 Touchpoint Pro system overview Module Module 19 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 2 Overview Introduction 2 2 Touchpoint Pro Controller Each Touchpoint Pro system has one Controller which forms the heart of the system It contains the Control Module and the User Interface and handles the communication for the system The Touchpoint Pro Controller can be housed in any of the standard Touchpoint Pro Enclosures or in a 19 rack where I O modules power supplies and the Communication Power Rail can be included The Controller can also be supplied as a front panel for mounting into a custom system Within the Controller the Control Module contains two major components the Control Centre Board and the Communication Board The Control Centre Board CCB deals with all functions related to system operation as well as the LED indicators and buttons on the front panel and the master system state relays An optional redundant CCB is available The Communication Board COB handles the rest of the user interfaces touchscreen bus output and other external interfaces such as the USB and Ethernet ports The Communication Board is completely independent from the Safety Function of the system 2 3 Remote Touchpoint Pro unit Each Touchpoint Pro system can contain multiple Remote Touchpoint Pro units The Remote units contain only I O modules and the Communication Power Rail plus power supplies if desired
87. 10 2 Wall Mounted Enclosures 10 2 1 Common Specifications 10 2 2 Analogue Input Module mA 10 2 3 Analogue Input Module mV Bridge 10 3 Floor Standing Enclosures 10 3 1 Floor Standing Cabinets Front Access 10 3 2 Floor Standing Cabinets Rear Access 10 4 Power Supplies and Fuses 10 4 1 Power Supply Units OEM Specifications 10 4 2 DIN Rail Module Supply and Communication 10 4 3 Ring Coupling Module RCM 10 4 4 Backplane 10 4 5 Power Supply Redundancy Module RDN Module 10 4 6 Uninterruptible Power Supply Module UPS 10 4 7 Backup Batteries 10 4 8 Cabinet DC Fuses 10 5 Control Module and User Interface 10 5 1 Controller amp Remote Unit DC Input Supply 10 5 2 Control Module and User Interface 10 6 I O Modules 10 6 1 Common Specifications 10 6 2 Analogue Input Module mA 10 6 3 Analogue Input Module mV Bridge 10 6 4 Digital Input Module 10 6 5 Relay Output Module Certification 11 1 EC declaration of conformity 11 2 Applicable National and International Standards 11 3 National and International Certificates Ordering Information 12 1 TPPR M Input and Output Configurator I O Configurator 12 2 Touchpoint Pro Control System Part Number Generator 12 3 TPPR V Controllers and Remote Units 12 4 TPPR H Enclosures 12 5 TPPR W PSUs Honeywell Analytics Product Warranty Appendix 1 Modbus Option Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 123 126 126 128 128 128 129 129 132 143 144 144 144 144 145 145 145 146 146 147 1
88. 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs rol Centre Board w o HON Logo forced ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF FS LXMXXF oor Standing Cabin D Card Modbus In oO S F S F S F SD Card Redundant Con d F S F S F S with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs erface Board w o HON Logo forced ventilation w o power distr bution TPPR HF FS LRMXXF w o power distribution Floor Standing Cabinet wi SD Card Redundant Con ith Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs rol Centre Board Modbus Interface Board w o HON Logo forced ventilation 168 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 12 Ordering Information Forced Ventilation and with plinth TPPR HF F LXXHPF Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs D Card with 100mm plinth forced ventilation TPPR HF F LRXHPF oor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs TPPR HF F LXMHPF oor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs D Card Modbus Interface Board with 100mm plinth forced ventilation ro S F SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board with 100mm plinth forced ventilation F S TPPR HF F LRMHPF
89. 23_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 8 Maintenance 1 If not already logged in login with a valid engineer level user name 2 From the System Status screen select the Inputs icon then select the channel to be calibrated 3 From the popup menu select Inhibit to inhibit the channel Inhibit Input Details Trend Graph Gas Calibration View Signal Figure 8 7 Inputs Screen with menu options 4 Select Calibration from the popup menu Gaskalibrierung Sperrung Figure 8 8 Calibration Screen 5 Select Zero Adjust and when ready press OK and apply clean air to the sensor 6 View the reading until it is stable and then press Accept 124 MAN0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 8 Maintenance Nullpunkt Just Annehmen Abbrechen Figure 8 9 Zero Calibration Screen 7 Confirm that the gas reading is zero and press Save then OK Zero Adjust Zero Adjust Zero Calibration successful for Input Channel i01 Please reset the Inhibit manually when calibration is complete OK Figure 8 10 Zero Calibration Confirmation 8 Select Span Adjust 9 Enter the concentration of the span gas and press Accept Span Adjust Accept Cancel Figure 8 11 Enter Span Gas Concentration 125 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 8 Maintenance 10 When ready press OK and apply gas to the sensor ay E Bereichs Just Bereichs J
90. 3 2 Digital Input Settings 15 3 3 Alarm Settings 15 3 4 Remote Interaction Settings 15 3 5 Remote Group Interaction Settings 15 4 Relay Output Module 15 4 1 Commission Channel 15 4 2 Relay Output Settings 15 4 3 Cause and Effect Type Selection 15 4 4 Input Channel Pre selection for Cause and Effect Matrix 15 4 5 Cause amp Effect Matrix Appendix 3 Wiring Diagrams 16 1 AIM 4 20 mA with 3 Wire Device Powered by AIM mA 16 2 AIM 4 20 mA with 2 Wire Device Powered by AIM mA 16 3 AIM 4 20 mA with 3 Wire Device Powered by External Power Supply 16 4 AIM 4 20 mA with 2 Wire Device Powered by External Power Supply 16 5 DIM in Unsupervised Configuration 16 6 DIM in Supervised Open Circuit Configuration 16 7 DIM in Supervised Configuration 16 8 AIM mV with Sensor connectivity 16 9 ROM With Internal Auxiliary Supply in NC and NO Configuration 16 10 ROM With External Auxiliary Supply in NC and NO Configuration Appendix 4 Abbreviations Appendix 5 User Interface Software Menu Structure 18 1 Menu Structure 18 1 1 Screen Navigation Sequence for Local HMI and Web Server 18 1 2 Sequence of System Configuration Screensfor Local Configuration and PC Configuration SW 18 1 3 Navigation Sequence for PC Configuration SW No Web 18 1 4 Ul Calibration Local HMI only Appendix 6 Glossary of Icons 19 1 Icons for Touchscreen 19 2 Icons for Web Server and PC Configuration Software Appendix 7 Logged events and where they are displayed Touchpoint
91. 48 148 148 148 149 149 149 150 150 151 151 152 152 152 152 152 153 153 154 154 155 155 155 156 158 158 160 161 163 175 176 177 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 14 1 14 2 14 3 14 4 14 5 14 6 14 7 Contents Introduction Installation 14 2 1 Installing the Bus Interface Board Upgrade or OEM Assembly by system integrators 14 2 2 Cable recommendation 14 2 3 Electrical connections 14 2 4 Configuration Examples 14 2 5 Termination resistor 14 2 6 Multi drop mode Configuration Register Allocation for Function 02 Read Input Status Register Allocation for Function 04 Read Input Registers 14 5 1 Analogue Registers Integer 14 5 2 Analogue Registers Float 14 5 3 Animation Registers Register Allocation for Function 03 06 Read Write Holding Registers 14 6 1 Query Poll Registers 14 6 2 Query Types available 14 6 3 Command Poll Registers 14 6 4 Command Types Available Exception Responses Appendix 2 Configurable Parameter Reference Guide 15 1 15 2 Analogue Input Module 4 20 mA 15 1 1 Commission Channel 15 1 2 Field Device Selection 15 1 3 Sensor Settings 15 1 4 Range Settings 15 1 5 Display Settings 15 1 6 Suppression Settings 15 1 7 Threshold Alarm 1 Settings 15 1 8 Threshold Alarm 2 Settings 15 1 9 Threshold Alarm 3 Settings 15 1 10 Threshold Alarm Hysteresis 15 1 11 Short Term Exposure Limit STEL Alarm Settings 15 1 12 Long Term Exposure Limi
92. 5 Contact is closed when a battery quality Replace Battery fault is detected 7 DO NOT USE x Inhibit PULS DIMENSION 55 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 4 Electrical Installation The UPS is shipped with the following default settings Before making connections confirm that the settings are as follows 1 Buffer time limiter switch is set to infinity position 2 Buffer voltage switch is set to 24V 3 Battery size switch on the side of the UPS is set to gt 10 Ah Note If the UPS Module with battery backup option is being used ensure that the power supply output voltage is adjusted to at least 26 Vdc to ensure sufficient charging of the battery To adjust the voltage locate the potentiometer labelled 24 28 Vdc on the front of the power supply and adjust it using a cross headed screwdriver WARNING When handling the batteries take great care not to connect the terminals together e g by a tool such as a screwdriver Note The maximum cable length between the Touchpoint Pro Battery Box and the Touchpoint Pro System UPS is 5 m Wire size must be 4 mm 1 Confirm that the batteries are connected as shown below 2400A1752 VE BLACK 240041750 2400A1751 FIAMM Battery Type FG21202 56 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 4 Electrical Installation 2 Before making connections ensure that the isolator switch is in th
93. 7 System Label Interfaces Ethernet Product Label USB HOST Power Supply Ring Network System State Relays RS 485 Interface 1 RS 485 Interface 2 USB TBI TB2 TB3 TB4 TBS TBS TB7 DEVICE J i 2 1J2 3 4 5 if2 3 415 1 213 1 2 3 T 2 3 4 5 1273 4 5 r g lels BIZ lo Madein el le wll le 8 2 8 2 8 g 5 XX g elge l la lE elez z TEs Fels zl2l8 3a zie 3 IB aI z g 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 s alog alo AIA OOVS bela bed be L Za a e jz az j la 5 a a Djo o Rapa ala al Pd Pad te al 14 5 Removing the Control Module Cover 3 Remove the two M4 locknut screws at the top of the cover 4 Loosen the M4 locknut screw on the underside of the cover 5 Carefully slide the cover off log eps Ene fee 14 6 Location of Bus Interface Board 6 Locate the Bus Interface Board BIB which is mounted on the right side of the Control Module motherboard 183 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 14 Appendix 1 Modbus Option 7 Set the jumpers for the appropriate channel to th
94. 802 41803 41804 41805 41806 10 41901 41902 41903 41904 41905 41906 Allowed values for the Result register 41n05 n 0 to 9 Value Meaning 0 SUCCESS 1 Command not permitted 2 Inter process communication failure 67 Failure 14 6 4 Command Types Available Note Function 06 cannot be used for SIL channels Command Type Description 23 Alarm Acknowledge 24 Alarm Reset 25 Set Inhibit 26 Clear inhibit Example Alarm Acknowledge Command Type Register Block Active Channel Type Channel ID Command Type Command Data Result 41n06 41n01 41n02 41n03 41n04 41n05 Value 1 105 2 23 0 Updated upon request execution 190 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 14 Appendix 1 Modbus Option If Block Active is set to 1 the Controller processes the request If Block Active is set to 0 the Controller will not process the request or has already processed the request The options for Channel Type are 105 Input Channel 111 Output Channel and 6 Global all channels If the Command Data is set to 0 the command will apply to all the channel alarms if a specific channel is identified or to all channels if the channel type is Global 14 7 Exception Responses The Modbus exception response is detailed in the Modicon Modbus manual Any one of the following exception responses may be returned by the Touchpoint Pro Modbus interface Exception Description 01 ILLEGAL FUNCT
95. 923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 14 Appendix 1 Modbus Option 14 1 Introduction The Touchpoint Pro Modbus Interface provides a facility for digital communication between the Touchpoint Pro and an external computer system Modbus is a well supported digital data communication protocol which provides a set of standard commands by which system data can be communicated The principal features of the Modbus Interface are e Operates as a Modbus Remote Terminal Unit RTU slave device node e Supports functions 02 03 04 06 and 16 of the Modbus protocol e Provides sensor gas readings and alarm status for Fault Inhibit Warning A1 A2 A3 STEL LTEL and Rate alarms from all input channels in the system e Supports commands to Inhibit Reset and Acknowledge for all channels in the system as well as Global Reset and Global Acknowledge e Dual RS485 half duplex communication with multi drop capability e Asynchronous serial link configurable for baud rate and parity Note The Modbus broadcast commands are not supported and will be ignored There are no standard Modbus function formats defined for the communication of data from a gas detection system The host computer system will therefore require programming in order to interpret the signal and status data made available by the Touchpoint Pro It is recommended that the host computer system should as a minimum be programmed to use Function 02 to collect alarm and statu
96. Acknowledged not used Alarm Alarm Alarm Data Type used future use future use 01 10001 10002 10003 10004 10005 10006 10007 10008 10009 10010 10011 10012 10013 10014 10015 10016 02 10017 10018 10019 10020 10021 10022 10023 10024 10025 10026 10027 10028 10029 10030 10031 10032 64 11009 11010 11011 11012 711013 11014 11015 11016 11017 11018 11019 11020 11021 11022 11023 11024 Output channels Channel Rate LTEL STEL Alarm3 Alarm2 Alarm1 Inhibit Fault No Channel Force SIL Channel Safe State Warning Acknowledged free Alarm Alarm Alarm Data Type state future use future use 01 11073 11074 11075 11076 11077 11078 11079 11080 11081 11082 11083 11084 11085 11086 11087 11088 02 11089 11090 11091 11092 11093 11094 11095 11096 11097 11098 11099 11100 11101 11102 11103 11104 128 13105 13106 13107 13108 13109 13110 13111 13112 138113 13114 13115 13116 13117 13118 13119 13120 Rate LTEL STEL Alarm 3 Alarm 2 Alarm 1 Inhibit Fault not not not not not not not not Alarm Alarm Alarm Summary Summary Summary Summary Summary used used used used used used used used Summary Summary
97. CBs SD Card Modbus Interface Board with 100mm plinth w o ventilation TPPR HF F LRMHPX Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board Modbus Interface Board with 100mm plinth w o ventilation TPPR HF F LXXXPX Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card w o HON Logo with 100mm plinth w o ventilation TPPR HF F LRXXPX Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board with 100mm plinth w o HON Logo w o ventilation TPPR HF F LXMXPX Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Modbus Interface Board with 100mm plinth w o HON Logo w o ventilation TPPR HF F LRMXPX Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board Modbus Interface Board with 100mm plinth w o HON Logo w o ventilation MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 12 Ordering Information Without ventilation with plinth without power distribution TPPR HF FS LXXHPX Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs D Card with 100mm plinth w o ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF FS LRXHPX oor St
98. Card is inserted in the Control Module SD Card socket with the configuration backup file saved in Hard Disk TPPR Configuration TPPR_Config_SystemID bin If not already logged in login with a valid administrator level user name From the System Status screen select the Extras icon then System Configuration Re enter the password and press Login 122 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 8 Maintenance Select CCB Management and click on Configuration Restore The system will display a message Present configuration in CCB will be replaced do you want to continue 7 Once the action is confirmed the configuration restoration process starts and a progress message is displayed The process may take several minutes depending on the system size 8 Once the configuration is restored it is recommended that a configuration report is created to verify the settings 8 8 Change the SD Card Note The system will provide a notification when the SD card is 80 full You then have the option of replacing the card with a new one or cutting and pasting the card contents into a desktop folder and reusing the same card This procedure does not need a password and can be carried out by any trained operator To change the SD Card you will need an unlocked and empty SD card formatted for Windows 1 From the System Status screen select Extras then SD Card 2 Select Eject SD Card 3 When prompted remove the SD Card
99. Check the LEDs on each Ring Coupling Module RCM in the system The LED flashes to indicate that data is being received therefore if an LED is not lit there is a problem in the preceding section of the ring network LEDs on the Ring coupling module indicate the presence of an incoming signal and they do not take into account the quality of the incoming signal Check the cables and connections in the area where the fault is indicated System The Event History file is The event history Please use the PC Configuration Software to view the Event too large to be viewed file has become too History or contact your local service representative who will be large for the local able to receive the file by e mail and process it for you system memory to process it System The system is There is a small If the problem cannot be remedied by a power cycle schedule consistently reporting CCB communication failure chance that the CCB has failed maintenance to fit a redundant CCB or to replace the master CCB Please contact your local service representative for further assistance Ring Oscillation Fault Ring faults are present or have occurred on the system when commissioning a module or ring circuit This may occur when all modules are unconfigured some modules are unconfigured or some modules are foreign unrecognised modules Remedial action 1 Take the unconfigured or foreign modules out of the system 2
100. Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board with 100mm plinth natural ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF FS LXMHPN Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Modbus Interface Board with 100mm plinth natural ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF FS LRMHPN Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board Modbus Interface Board with 100mm plinth natural ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF FS LXXXPN Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card w o HON Logo with 100mm plinth natural ventilation w o power distribution 167 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 12 Ordering Information TPPR HF FS LRXXPN Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Con power distribution trol Centre Board with 100mm plinth w o HON Logo natural ventilation w o TPPR HF FS LXMXPN TPPR HF FS LRMXPN Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs natural ventilation w o power distribution Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Modbus Interface Board with 100mm plinth
101. Default Setting Value Range Comment Threshold Alarm 2 FSD 0 0 to 10 0 FSD The hysteresis value will be applied to a channel coming out Hysteresis of an alarm condition e g if the alarm level is 20 FSD and hysteresis is set to 2 the alarm will not be cancelled until the reading has dropped below 18 FSD 15 1 11 Short Term Exposure Limit STEL Alarm Settings Caution In some countries the use of STEL and LTEL alarms with fixed gas detection equipment is not recommended Refer to local and national regulations Note The Short Term Exposure Limit STEL calculation is a moving time weighted average TWA gas reading over a given time interval STEL Time Interval The STEL alarm is set if the result exceeds the configured STEL Alarm Level The STEL sample rate is 4 Hz and the STEL reading is updated every 30 s STEL HM_TWA1 HM_TWA2 HM_TWAG HM_TWAN STELN where STEL Short Term Exposure Limit TWA HM_TWA1 1st Half Minute TWA HM_TWA2 2nd Half Minute TWA HM_TWAN Nth Half Minute TWA STELN Number of Half Minute TWA Samples received in STEL interval Access Level Engineer Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range STEL Alarm Enable Disabled Enabled Disabled STEL Alarm Level 20 FSD According to sensor range STEL Alarm Latch Latching Latching Non Latching STEL Time Interval 10 min 5 10 15 20 30 40 and 60 min 15 1 12 Long Term Exposure Li
102. Editing a Configured Channel 15 4 1 Commission Channel Access Level Administrator Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range Comment Channel ID Next available 1 to 128 Can only be assigned during first time configuration Otherwise de commission the channel and re assign another channel number Channel Location Tag Channel lt Channel ID gt Maximum 30 Alphanumeric Characters 30 character location tag name This is the main channel description used throughout the interface Channel Custom ID Channel lt Channel ID gt Maximum 20 Alphanumeric Characters 20 character custom ID This is displayed on the Channel Details screen and in the Configuration Report Note Channel Location Tag and Channel Custom ID only require Engineer level access for editing 15 4 2 Relay Output Settings Access Level Engineer Safe modules Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range Comment Normal State De energised for Standard De energised Energised Not configurable for a Safe ROM modules Energised for Latch Function Non Latching Non Latching Latching The alarm conditions are usually already configured as latching therefore the output channel is configured non latching as default set ing Delay Time 00m 00s 00m 00s to 05m 00s The output module wil activate the output channel after the Delay Time interval has expired Th
103. Extras Alarms 7 4 1 View active alarms 7 4 2 Acknowledge an active alarm 7 4 3 Reset a latched alarm Faults and Warnings 7 5 1 View Faults and Warnings 7 5 2 Acknowledge an active Fault or Warning 7 5 3 Reset a latched Fault or Warning Inhibit View Input Channels and Input Details View Output Channels View Trend Graph View Event History Generate Reports Access Diagnostic information Check the capacity of the SD Card Access Help System State Relays Maintenance Testing the Touchpoint Pro System 8 1 1 Introduction 8 1 2 Field Inputs Test 8 1 3 Configuration Settings Test 8 1 4 Cause and Effect Test Routine maintenance Exercise the relays How to replace a faulty I O module How to add a new I O Module How to Remove or Decommission an I O Module Backup Restore configuration Change the SD Card Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 110 110 111 112 113 114 114 115 119 120 122 123 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 10 11 12 13 14 Contents 8 9 Calibrate mV input channels 8 10 Touchpoint Pro Battery Box 8 10 1 DC UPS LED Indications 8 10 2 Routine maintenance 8 10 3 Changing a fuse 8 10 4 Replacement Batteries Problem Solving 9 1 Troubleshooting 9 2 List of Error Codes 9 3 Further Assistance Specifications 10 1 Rack Mounted Equipment 10 1 1 Touchpoint Pro User Interface only 10 1 2 19 5U Rack Enclosure with User Interface 10 1 3 19 5U Remote Unit Enclosure without User Interface
104. For the large batteries only fit a lug Supplied to each battery terminal using the fixings supplied The correct sequence for the fixings is bolt flat washer battery terminal lug flat washer spring washer nut as shown below 2 Ensure that the securing strap supplied is open and clear of the battery seating surface 41 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 3 Mechanical Installation 3 Insert the first battery and slide to the right Note The battery mounting plate is offset Fit the right hand battery first to avoid the second battery being restricted by the enclosure 4 Insert the second battery Note Ensure that the batteries are orientated as shown in the diagram large batteries with the terminals at the centre of the enclosure small batteries with the terminals at the front of the enclosure Place the securing strap around the batteries connect the buckle and pull it tight Connect the Red wire from the box terminal to the positive terminal of the left hand battery Connect the Black wire from the box terminal to the negative terminal of the right hand battery ono Connect the cable and fuse assembly between the remaining two battery terminals red to positive black to negative 2400A1752 WV TO UPS 2400A1750 2400A1751 FIAMM Battery Type FG21202 9 Identify the required cable entry points Unscrew and remove the cable gland plate 42 MANO923_I
105. I PCBs SD Card with 100mm plinth forced ventilation TPPR HF R LRXHPF Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board with 100mm plinth forced ventilation TPPR HF R LXMHPF Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Modbus Interface Board with 100mm plinth forced ventilation TPPR HF R LRMHPF Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board Modbus Interface Board with 100mm plinth forced ventilation TPPR HF R LXXXPF Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card w o HON Logo with 100mm plinth forced ventilation TPPR HF R LRXXPF Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board with 100mm plinth w o HON Logo forced ventilation TPPR HF R LXMXPF Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Modbus Interface Board with 100mm plinth w o HON Logo forced ventilation TPPR HF R LRMXPF Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board Modbus Interface Board with 100mm plinth w o HON Logo forced ventilation oO oO
106. ION Only Modbus functions 02 03 04 and 06 are supported This response is returned if any other requests are received 02 ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS The register addresses supported by each function are listed in this chapter Any attempt to access a register outside of these ranges will result in this error 03 ILLEGAL DATA VALUE This exception is returned if the request has the incorrect length or if the maximum number of registers is exceeded The maximum number of registers that can be requested by function 02 is 512 function 04 is 64 and function 03 is 36 for the Query poll block or 6 for the Command poll block 06 SLAVE DEVICE BUSY Applies to function 06 only Once a poll or command block s active register has been set its contents must not be changed until the main program has carried out the request This exception is returned if any attempt is made to change an active poll or command block Note A function 06 that leaves the block unchanged will not generate this error 191 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 15 Appendix 2 Configurable Parameter Reference Guide Note For text fields the maximum number of characters that can be entered is given throughout this reference guide However in exceptional cases where many wide characters are used the text may be too long for the field The full text will be visible in any reports 15 1 Analogue Input Module 4 20 mA The Analogue Input
107. Limit 1 5mA 0 7 to 4 0 The Signal Under Range Fault will be set if the sensor signal reading is mA less than the configured Signal Under Range Limit Signal Under Range Latch Latching Non Latching Latching Signal Over Range Limit 22 0mA 20 0 to 24 0 The Signal Over Range Fault will be set if the sensor signal reading is mA greater than the configured Signal Over Range Limit Signal Over Range Latch Latching Non Latching Latching 15 1 17 Gas Range Fault Settings Access Level Engineer Parameter Name Default Value Range Comment Setting Gas Under Range Limit 10 FSD According to The Gas Under Range Fault will be set if the calculated gas sensor range concentration is less than the configured Gas Under Range Limit This fault may be due to the sensor signal drifting below the normal Zero operating point Gas Under Range Latch Latching Non Latching Latching Gas Over Range Limit 110 FSD According to The Gas Over Range Warning will be set if the calculated gas sensor range concentration is greater than the configured Gas Over Range Limit Gas Over Range Latch Latching Non Latching Latching 15 1 18 Calibration Reminder Settings Access Level Engineer Note Once the Calibration Overdue Warning is active it can only be cleared by calibrating the channel Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range Co
108. N Logo natural ventilation TPPR HF R LXMXPN Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Modbus Interface Board with 100mm plinth w o HON Logo natural ventilation TPPR HF R LRMXPN Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card w o HON Logo natural Natural Ventilation and with plinth without power distribution TPPR HF RS LXXHPN Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card with 100mm plinth natural ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF RS LRXHPN Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board with 100mm plinth natural ventilation w o power distribution 172 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 12 Ordering Information Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions TPPR HF RS LXMHPN Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D in Modbus Interface Board with 100mm plinth natural ventilatio cludes Control er with HM n w o power distribution PCBs SD Card TPPR HF RS LRMHPN TPPR HF RS LXXXPN TPPR HF RS LRXXPN Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D i Redundant Control Centre Board Modbus Interface Board wit power distribution Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D i w o HON Logo
109. Name Web Administrator Maintenance Operator View Engineer LTEL Alarm Settings No Y Y N Rate Alarm Settings 1 No Y Y N Rate Alarm Settings 2 No Y Y N Rate Alarm Settings 2 No Y Y N Inhibit Delay Settings No Y Y N Signal Range Fault Settings No Y Y N Gas Range Fault Settings No Y Y N 70 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 5 User Interface Calibration Reminder Settings 0 Y Y N N Calibration Signal Settings 0 Y Y N N Calibration Span Gas Settings 0 Y Y N N Inhibit Signalling Settings 0 Y Y N N Fault Signalling Settings 1 o Y Y N N Custom Fault X Detail Settings 0 Y Y N N Fault Signalling Settings 2 0 Y Y N N Digital Input Settings No Y Y N N Alarm Settings 0 Y Y N N Remote Interaction Settings 0 Y Y N N Remote Group Interaction Settings 0 Y Y N N Relay Output Settings 0 Y Y N N Relay Output Settings 0 Y Y N N Relay Timing Settings 0 Y Y N N Input Channel Pre Selection 0 Y Y N N Cause amp Effect Matrix 0 Y Y N N System Interaction Sysinteract Acknowledge Y Y Y N Sysinteract Reset Y Y Y N Sysinteract Inhibit Y Y N N Sysinteract Clear Inhibit Y Y N N Syslnteract Force Output No Y Y y N Syslnteract Clear Force Output No Y Y N N 71 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 5 User Interface 5 3 User Interfac
110. O Module de commissioned because one or module must be 2 Retry the operation more channels on this module are de commissioned before commissioned Please a module can be de commission all channels before de commissioned de commissioning the module 25 Operation failed Module ID does not Please refer to error 23 Please refer to error 23 match 26 Operation failed an I O Module with Each Touchpoint Pro Contact your local representative to obtain a the same UDID does already exist on component has a unique replacement module the system identifying code 27 Operation failed the intended These errors may occur Depending on the intended operation either operation is not allowed for the if configuration of the Restart the configuration for the module or from the current I O Module state module or its channels configuration screen remove the module and restart was interrupted leaving commissioning or Force the module to Normal state the module in an undetermined state 28 The 1 0 Module could not be found Please refer to error 23 Please refer to error 23 on the network unknown UDID 29 The I O Module could not be found Please refer to error 23 Please refer to error 23 on the network unknown SDID 30 Operation failed I O Module state is Please refer to error 27 Please refer to error 27 invalid 134 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 9 Problem Solving
111. Operating Instructions Honeywell Touchpoint Pro MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Section Contents 1 Safety and Information 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 How to use this manual Safety Hazards Location and Description of Warning Labels 1 3 1 Safety Warning Labels 1 3 2 Equipment Rating Labels Hazardous Locations Disposal 1 4 1 Touchpoint Pro System 1 4 2 Packaging 1 4 3 Batteries Restriction of Hazardous Substances ROHS Directive Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment WEEE Directive Information 2 Overview Introduction Touchpoint Pro Touchpoint Pro Controller Remote Touchpoint Pro unit System Topology Communication Power Rail and Ring Network Input Output I O modules 2 6 1 Available Modules System Interaction Sensor Catalogue Power Supply Options 2 9 1 Touchpoint Pro Power Supplies 2 9 2 Touchpoint Pro Power Redundancy Module 2 9 3 Touchpoint Pro UPS Module with Backup Battery 3 Mechanical Installation 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 Siting considerations Wall Mounted Enclosures 3 2 1 Small Wall Mounted Enclosure Mild Steel 3 2 2 Medium Wall Mounted Enclosure Mild Steel 3 2 3 Large Wall Mounted Enclosure Mild Steel Hazardous Area Enclosure Floor Standing Enclosures 3 4 1 Floor Standing Cabinet Front Access 3 4 2 Floor Standing Cabinet Rear Access 19 Rack mounted unit Panel Mount Controller Touchpoint Pro Battery Box 3 7 1 Siting consider
112. ROM User Inhibit Channel has been inhibited by the user ROM User Inhibit Cleared SD Card Full Overwriting old Y data SD Card inserted SD Card memory 80 full Y SD Card missing Y SD card system ID mismatch The inserted SD card contains data from a different Touchpoint Pro system Sensor Catalogue Logged when sensor catalogue is updated Sensor Lifetime Exceeded Sensitivity of the mV sensor has A mV dropped below 50 of the original value Sensor Lifetime Exceeded mV Cleared Session kill by UI A user on the touchscreen has ended another user s login session Session kill by PC A user on the PC Configuration Software has ended another user s login session Short Circuit TBC Y mA mV Short Circuit Cleared mA mV Signal Over Range Sensor mA or mV signal reading is A mA mV greater than the configured Signal Over Range Limit 237 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 20 Appendix 7 Logged events and where they are displayed Displayed ee F Specific Event Comment Input Output Active Inputs Channel Type Details Details Events Outputs if applicable screen screen screen screen Signal Under Range Sensor mA or mV signal reading Y mA mV is less than the configured Signal Under Range Limit Signal Under Range Cleared mA mV Span Calibration Logged when span calibrati
113. SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board Modbus Interface Board w o ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF FS LXXXXX Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card w o HON Logo w o ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF FS LRXXXX Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board w o HON Logo w o ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF FS LXMXXX Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Modbus Interface Board w o HON Logo w o ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF FS LRMXXX Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board Modbus Interface Board w o HON Logo w o ventilation Without Ventilation and with plinth 165 TPPR HF F LXXHPX Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card with 100mm plinth w o ventilation TPPR HF F LRXHPX Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board with 100mm plinth w o ventilation TPPR HF F LXMHPX Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI P
114. Safety and Information 1 1 How to use this manual The intention of this manual is that it is written in standalone sections so that the user can access only the relevant information required at any time It is strongly recommended that the index bookmarks are used for easy navigation The manual is structured as follows Chapter Title Topic 1 Safety and Information Safety Regulatory Compliance and other important information 2 Overview An overview of the Touchpoint Pro system and its components 3 Mechanical Installation Instructions for mechanical installation of Touchpoint Pro units as well as details for system integrator customers of how to assemble a system 4 Electrical Installation Instructions for electrical installation of Touchpoint Pro units including power supply calculation cabling and earthing recommendations and all wiring information 5 User Interface A description of the Touchpoint Pro user interface including menu structure and access permissions 6 Commissioning Instructions for first time switch on and configuration of the Touchpoint Pro system 7 Normal Operation Instructions for normal day to day operation of the Touchpoint Pro system 8 Maintenance Recommended maintenance operations and details of how to carry out hardware and firmware upgrades 9 Problem Solving How to troubleshoot scenarios that may be encountered and details of error co
115. T4 CSA C22 2 No 152 Tamb 40 C to 70 C 2400D1305 Note Similar labels appear on AIM mV DIM RCM ROM Modules and the Backplanes Note The CE mark and Notified Body number 0518 shown on labels does not apply to Type n approval 15 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 1 Safety and Information 1 4 Disposal 1 4 1 Touchpoint Pro System The Touchpoint Pro system is constructed from the following materials Wall Mounted Enclosure Powder coated mild steel Zintec 19 Rack Powder coated mild steel I O Modules Casing Polyamide PA 6 6 VO UL94 grey Contents printed circuit boards Power Supply Units Casing Back case Aluminum Top case with mesh Steel with Nickel plating Contents printed circuit boards Ring Coupling Module Casing Polyamide PA 6 6 VO UL94 green Contents printed circuit boards 1 4 2 Packaging Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions Touchpoint Pro outer packaging is made from cardboard Facilities for recycling are widely available Touchpoint Pro inner packaging used inside the Wall Mounted Enclosure is made from Stratocell a Low Density Polyethylene LDPE foam The foam can be recycled and used as Stratocell again where such recycling facilities exist MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 1 Safety and Information 1 4 3 Batteries Below is a listing of batteries present in the products covered by this manual
116. TPPR V 1243 Mounting plate blank 780Hx510W Stainless Steel Div2 Zone2 TPPR V 1294 Lifing Eyes for Floor Standing Cabinet TPPR V 1295 Wall Mounting Brackets for Standard Wall Mount Enclosure TPPR V 1298 Wall Mounting Brackets for Floor Standing Cabinet TPPR V 1984 Enclosure Breather Drain TPPR V 1995 24V DC LED Light w Movement Sensor Floor Cabinet TPPR V 1996 Roof Outlet Vent Floor Cabinet Natural or Forced Ventilation TPPR V 1997 Door Inlet Vent Floor Cabinet Natural or Forced Ventilation TPPR V 1998 Thermostat Floor Cabinet Forced Ventilation TPPR V 1999 24V DC Filter Fan Floor Cabinet Forced Ventilation 4 Touchpoint Pro Manuals TPPR L 2500 TPPR CD multi language TPPR L 2501 TPPR Operating Instruction Hard Copy English 12 4 TPPR H Enclosures TPPR H Wall Mount Enclosure TPPR H Small Wall Mount Enclosures TPPR HW S LXXHXX Wall Mount Controller 600Hx600Wx300D includes HMI PCBs SD Card TPPR HW S LRXHXX Wall Mount Controller 600Hx600Wx300D includes HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board TPPR HW S LXMHXX Wall Mount Controller 600Hx600Wx300D includes HMI PCBs SD Card Modbus Interface Board TPPR HW S LRMHXX Wall Mount Controller 600Hx600Wx300D includes HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board Modbus Interface Board TPPR HW S LXXXXX Wall Mount Controller GOOHX600Wx300D includes HMI PCBs SD Card w o HON Logo TPPR HW S LRXXXX Wall Mount Controller 600Hx600Wx300D inc
117. The Rate of Change Alarm is set when a specific rate of rise or fall depending if the Rate Alarm Trigger is set as Rising or Falling is observed The Alarm Level and the Alarm Interval can be configured If the Alarm Level 10 LEL and the Alarm Interval 5 s the Rate Alarm will be set if the concentration has risen by 10 LEL within 5 s The rate alarm is calculated from the displayed reading Note If zero suppression is used it has the effect of sensitizing the rate alarm It is recommended to set the rate alarm to twice the suppression band value to avoid nuisance alarms Access Level Engineer Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range Rate Alarm Enable Disabled Enable Disable Rate Alarm Level 5 FSD According to sensor range Rate Alarm Trigger Rising Rising Falling Rate Alarm Latch Latching Non Latching Latching 15 2 12 Rate Alarm Settings 2 Access Level Engineer Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range Comment Rate Alarm Time Interval 1s 1sto30s Determines the Rate Alarm evaluation interval 204 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 15 Appendix 2 Configurable Parameter Reference Guide 15 2 13 Inhibit Delay Settings Access Level Engineer Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range Comment Power On Delay Enable Enabled Enabled Disabled lf enabled the channel will be inhibited for a specific
118. XHXN Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board natural ventilation TPPR HF R LXMHXN Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Modbus Interface Board natural ventilation TPPR HF R LRMHXN Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board Modbus Interface Board natural ventilation TPPR HF R LXXXXN Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card w o HON Logo natural ventilation TPPR HF R LRXXXN Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board w o HON Logo natural ventilation TPPR HF R LXMXXN Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Modbus Interface Board w o HON Logo natural ventilation 171 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 12 Ordering Information Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions Redundant Control Centre Board Modbus Interface Board wit ventilation h 100mm plinth TPPR HF R LRMXXN Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear
119. _ we NC Channel 4 11 oe a NO Configuration Notes 1 For all shielded cables shield screen should be connected to Earth tag bar bus bar provided in Touchpoint Pro enclosure 2 Maximum 24Vdc Output Load 1 5A per channel and 1 5A total per module With Overload protection 3 Maximum Relay contact rating 5A 24Vdc and 5A 230Vac resistive loads only 220 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 17 Appendix 4 Abbreviations Abbreviation Meaning A1 A2 or A3 Level 1 2 or 3 Threshold Alarm AIM Analogue Input Module AOM Analogue Output Module CCB Control Centre Board COB Communication Board cM Control Module C amp E Cause and Effect usually used in conjunction with the C amp E Matrix DIM Digital Input Module DOM Digital Output Module HART Highway Addressable Remote Transducer 1 0 Input Output IP Internet Protocol LAN Local Area Network LCD Liquid Crystal Display LED Light Emitting Diode NOC NO Normally Open Contact Relay contacts that are normally open when a power supply is absent open circuit NCC NC Normally Closed Contact Relay contacts that are normally closed when a power supply is absent closed circuit os Operating System P2P Peer to Peer PCB Printed Circuit Board RAM Random Access Memory volatile memory RCM Ring Coupling Module RDN Redundant power supply mod
120. ackup of the previous data 108 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 7 Normal Operation 7 12 Access Diagnostic information Note Engineer access level is required The Diagnostics screen gives information about the firmware versions of system components and details of the status and any errors This information could be required by Honeywell Analytics to assist with technical support The Diagnostics screen also provides access to the Touchpoint Pro system test modes see Testing the Touchpoint Pro System To access Diagnostics from the System Status screen navigation bar select Extras then Diagnostics The Diagnostics screen also provides access to a drop down menu that offers the following tests LED Panel Test Field Inputs Test Configuration Settings Test e e e e Cause and Effect Test Further information can be found in Testing the Touchpoint Pro System 7 13 Check the capacity of the SD Card From the System Status screen navigation bar select Extras then SD Card This will show the capacity and remaining space on the inserted SD Card For details of how to change the card please see Maintenance 7 14 Access Help From the System Status screen navigation bar select Extras then Help This help screen will show Date of last configuration change Configuration version Previous user with About amp Service contact option The configuration version increments every time parame
121. acy errors Caution Ensure that any executive action is inhibited before starting this test Note Engineer level access is required Note If the sensor is an Oxygen sensor that is not being used with a transmitter that has a force mA function the zero gas should be 100 v v Nitrogen and the span gas should normally be air at 20 9 v v Oxygen The Touchpoint Pro controller calibration should not be used to correct deficiencies in the sensor calibration instead carry out a gas calibration at the sensor according to the manufacturer s instructions Note If you wish to enable a calibration reminder for the channel please edit this setting before starting calibration see Commissioning Editing a Configured Channel and Configurable Parameter Reference Guide Calibration Reminder Settings To calibrate the mA loop of an input channel please follow the procedure below in combination with the relevant instructions in the sensor manual 90 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro k a M9 NOOR WN 12 Operating Instructions 6 Commissioning If not already logged in login with a valid engineer level user name From the System Status screen select the Inputs icon El then select the channel to be calibrated Select Calibration from the popup menu Press Inhibit to inhibit the channel Select Zero Adjust and when ready press OK Generate a zero signal at the sensor preferably by forcing the output to 4 mA View the signal readin
122. alling the Bus Interface Board Upgrade or Assembly by system integrators Caution All electronic hardware and PCB assemblies contain static sensitive components Take appropriate precautions to minimise the risk of electrostatic discharge Caution The SD Card any USB device and all cables must be removed before attempting to remove the Control Module cover panel If not already fitted the Bus Interface Board is installed as follows 1 Power off the supply to the system 2 Locate the cover panel of the Control Module 3 Remove all cables WARNING SD Memory Card Remove top and bottom Plugs JOP T55 SOOM T55 of TB9 TB8 before opening the cover sT Screen TBS 5 Screen TBE 4 PSU4_Stat2 4 PSU2_Stat2 3 PSU4_Stat1 3 PSU2_Stat1 2 PSU3_Stat2 2 PSU1_Stat2 1 Psu3_Stat1 1 PSU1_Stat 1 System Label Interfaces Ethernet Product Label USB HOST Power Supply Ring Network System State Relays RS 485 Interface 1 RS 485 Interface 2 USB TBI TB2 TBS TB4 TBS TBS TB7 DEVICE _ DE 1 J2 3J4 5 12 J3 J415 1213 12 3 1 2 3 4 5 112345 2 g 3 lols 8 2 0 Made in 3 le a 4 lo 2 2151 eae 8 5 E g ele l la lE glg zee Elels a zl25 55 22555 gt 2 2 2 21s 2 2l2 2 s al o 8 a la fal al bal Sog L ala a lz jz lle le io a a 6 Do A z jz aj PAEA J
123. an signal is below the Minimum Span Signal 15 1 20 Calibration Span Gas Settings Access Level Engineer Note These settings refer to the range of gas concentration values that can be used for span calibration and are used to ensure that the sensor is calibrated at an appropriate level Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range Comment Maximum Span Gas Conc 100 FSD 80 to 100 FSD According to Sets the Maximum Span Gas Concentration that sensor range can be used during calibration Must be greater than the Minimum Span Gas Conc Minimum Span Gas Conc 30 FSD 15 to 80 FSD According to Sets the Minimum Span Gas Concentration that sensor range can be used during calibration Has to be less than the Maximum Span Gas Conc Default Span Gas Conc 50 FSD According to sensor range Sets the Default Span Gas Concentration to be used during calibration 15 1 21 Inhibit Signalling Settings Access Level Engineer Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range Comment Inhibit Signalling Enable Disabled Enabled Disabled If enabled a specific signal level from the sensor will activate an inhibit condition for the channel Inhibit Level Max 2 0 mA 1 0 to 3 9 mA The recommended minimum difference between Inhibit Level Max and Inhibit Level Min is 0 2 mA Inhibit Level Min 2 0 mA 0 8 to 3 8 mA 199 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instr
124. and Channel Custom ID only require Engineer level access for editing 15 3 2 Digital Input Settings Note These parameters can only be set on first configuration To edit later it is necessary to decommission and re commission the channel Access Level Engineer Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range Comment Input Type Supervised OC SC Unsupervised A digital input usually a switch can be connected Supervised OC unsupervised Supervised for open circuit OC or Supervised OC SC supervised for both open circuit and short circuit SC See Electrical Installation Connections Digital Input Module for details Default State Normally Open NO Normally Closed NC This parameter is not configurable for a SIL input channel for Standard modules Normally Open NO Normally Closed NC for Safe modules 207 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 15 Appendix 2 Configurable Parameter Reference Guide 15 3 3 Alarm Settings Access Level Engineer Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range Comment Input Latch Latching Non Latching Latching Event Type Alarm Alarm Fault Warning 15 3 4 Remote Interaction Settings Access Level Engineer Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range Comment Remote Reset Enable Disabled Enabled Disabled The digital input can be used to reset latched alarm conditions or la
125. anding Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs TPPR HF FS LXMHPX oor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs S F SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board with 100mm plinth w o ventilation w o power distribution F SD Card Modbus Interface Board with 100mm plinth w o ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF FS LRMHPX Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board Modbus Interface Board with 100mm plinth w o ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF FS LXXXPX oor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs D Card w o HON Logo with 100mm plinth w o ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF FS LRXXPX oor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs istribution TPPR HF FS LXMXPX oor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs D Card Modbus Interface Board with 100mm plinth w o HON Logo w o ventilation w o power F S F SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board with 100mm plinth w o HON Logo w o ventilation w o power d F S distribution TPPR HF FS LRMXPX Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes
126. ant Control Centre Board Modbus Interface Board with 100mm plinth w o HON Logo forced ventilation w o power distribution TPPR H Floor Standing Cabinets Rear Access Without Ventilation and without plinth TPPR HF R LXXHXX Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card w o ventilation 169 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 12 Ordering Information Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions TPPR HF R LRXHXX Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board w o ventilation TPPR HF R LXMHXX Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Modbus Interface Board w o ventilation TPPR HF R LRMHXX Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board Modbus Interface Board w o ventilation TPPR HF R LXXXXX Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card w o HON Logo w o ventilation TPPR HF R LRXXXX Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board w o HON Logo w o ventilation TPPR HF R LXMXXX Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Modbus
127. are configured correctly including delay on off times etc By forcing the state of the output channel to either activate or de activate the corresponding change in state of the output device after application of delay on off times can be viewed on the touchscreen or the Web Server To use the Cause and Effect Test mode 1 If not already logged in login with a valid engineer level user name 2 From the System Status screen select the Extras icon then Diagnostics s Press the Menu icon and select Cause and Effect Test 4 The system will ask you to confirm press Yes to proceed 5 The system will display a confirmation message click on OK and you will be automatically navigated to the Outputs screen 6 Select the channel to be tested and select Output Details from the popup menu 7 Press the Menu icon w and select Force Input States to do a full test of the Cause and Effect matrix test 1 described above 8 The system will display a matrix of all the input channels that are linked to the output channel being tested 9 Select the input channel states that you wish to simulate and click on Force The cells corresponding to the forced states will be coloured 10 The system will return to the Outputs screen where the results of the forced input states can be viewed 11 When ready return to the Output Details screen press the Menu icon wd and select Clear Force 12 Repeat steps 6 11 for the next channel 13 To force the output relays
128. at channel 15 4 4 Input Channel Pre selection for Cause and Effect Matrix Normal Relay channel only Note Engineer level access required This screen helps to reduce the number of channels listed in the Cause and Effect Matrix to only the channels the operator would like to map Select the required input channels to link to this relay output channel by checking the box next to the channel ID The details of this link Alarm1 Warning will be assigned in the next screen Note If you used the option to copy from a configured channel the input channels linked to that channel will be automatically pre selected The alarms faults etc associated with these channels may be disabled in the next screen if required 15 4 5 Cause amp Effect Matrix Note Engineer level access required 1 For each input channel select the status conditions alarm fault warning etc to be considered by checking the appropriate boxes Note The column for Alarm 1 is shared with STEL Alarm 2 shared with LTEL and Alarm 3 shared with Rate Alarm in each case the output will activate for either condition 2 Enter the vote count and specify if the vote count should include at least one alarm Note Enabling the At least one alarm option means that there will be output only when an alarm is active while faults warnings and inhibits will be ignored even when the vote count is exceeded Note The number of selected channels is shown at the bot
129. ation 3 On the front panel press the Accept and Reset buttons together for 10 s which will restart the COB 4 Retry the operation 115 Operation cannot be performed 1 Check that the SD Card memory device has please insert SD Card enough free memory available for the operation 2 Check that it is correctly inserted in the socket 3 Retry the operation 116 Operation failed transaction could Please refer to error 2 Please refer to error 2 not be closed 117 Operation failed response parsing Please refer to error 2 Please refer to error 2 failure 142 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 9 Problem Solving Error Message Possible Cause Remedial Action Code 249 Operation not allowed please reset An individual alarm reset First reset Gas Over Range and then attempt to reset Gas Over Range warning and try is attempted when Gas the alarm again over range warning is present 250 Operation failed kill session denied A user has attempted Try after some time when memory update is as CCB is busy performing critical to end a session while completed operation the CCB is updating memory as result of a configuration request 252 Operation failed Redundant CCB Redundant CCB Remedy the fault and then update the firmware failed Please power cycle the failed during firmware controller and try again download 253 STEL timer is reset by this operation Channe
130. ations 3 7 2 Installation and Assembly 3 7 2 1 Mounting the Touchpoint Pro Battery Box to a wall 3 7 3 Touchpoint Pro Battery Box Assembly Cooling and Ventilation 4 Electrical Installation 4 1 4 2 Power Consumption Power Supply 4 2 1 AC Power Input 4 2 2 DC Power Input 4 2 3 DC Power Output Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 Contents Cabling Requirements 4 3 1 Ring Network 4 3 2 Field devices 4 3 3 Power Supplies 4 3 4 Bus interfaces 4 3 5 Ethernet 4 3 6 Touchpoint Pro Battery Box Cabling Requirements Additional info for assembly by system integrators 4 4 1 24 Vdc Power Controller 4 4 2 Internal network connections Ring Network Distance Restrictions Earthing EMC RFI Considerations Electrical Connections 4 8 1 Touchpoint Pro Power Supplies 4 8 1 1 120 W 24 Vdc Power Supply Unit 4 8 1 2 240 W 24 Vdc Power Supply Unit 4 8 1 3 480 W 24 Vdc Power Supply Unit 4 8 2 Power Redundancy Module 4 8 3 UPS and Battery Box 4 8 4 Analogue Input Module 4 20 mA 4 8 5 Analogue Input Module mV Bridge 4 8 6 Digital Input Module 4 8 7 Relay Output Module 4 8 8 Ring Coupling Module 4 8 9 System State Relays 4 8 10 Power Supply Unit Status Inputs 5 User Interface 5 1 General 5 2 Access Levels 5 3 User Interface Software 5 4 Local Interface Touchscreen 5 5 Web Server 5 6 PC Configuration Software 5 7 SD Card 5 8 Interfaces 6 Commiss
131. auxiliary voltage output channels Auxiliary output overload ROM acknowledged Auxiliary output overload cleared ROM Bead Current Fault When bead current for channel Y mV deviates 1 from configured value Bead Current Fault Cleared mV Buzzer Activation Settings The buzzer can be configured to Modified determine by which event types it is activated the setting has been changed Calibration Active Calibration Inactive Calibration Overdue The configured Calibration mA mV Reminder Interval has been exceeded Calibration Overdue Cleared mA mV Cause and Effect Test ended Cause and Effect Test started Y CCB Configuration Modified CCB FW Update Logged when CCB firmware is updated CCB Master Configuration CCB configuration has been transferred transferred from the master to the redundant CCB CCB Redundancy Mode changed CCB redundancy mode can be either single or dual CCB CCB Redundant Configuration CCB configuration has been transferred transferred from the redundant to the master CCB CCB COB Communication lost Error in the system or fault with CCBs Channel Decommissioned All 231 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 20 Appendix 7 Logged events and where they are displayed Displayed ee F Specific Event Comment Input Output Active inputs Channel Type Details
132. available via the Web Server for safety reasons for example Calibration Touchpoint Pro is supplied with a default Administrator level account For security reasons this will be attached to the system touchscreen When the system is configured at least one new Administrator account should be created The default Administrator should then log out and then log back in as the new Administrator and should then delete the default Administrator account to prevent unauthorized access The Administrator can create other users with Administrator level access or lower and the Maintenance 68 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 5 User Interface Engineer can create users with Engineer level access or lower Caution Forgotten or deleted passwords cannot be recovered It is therefore advisable to have two Administrators so that one can replace the passwords of any other users Note Only Administrators can end another user s active session even if it has timed out Note The user login times out after 20 minutes of inactivity Screen Name Web Administrator Maintenance Operator View Engineer System Status Active Events Y Y Y Y Inputs Y Y Y y Outputs Y y Y Y Input Detail Y Y Y y Trend Y Y Y Y Trend Configuration Security Y y Y y Calibration No Y Y N N Span Adjust No Y N N Zero Adjust No Y Y N N Extras Y Y Y Y Event History Y Y Y y SD Card
133. avigation are as detailed in the section Menu Structure however multiple screens are combined reducing the overall commissioning time Note the PC Configuration Software is compatible with Windows 7 Please refer to Chapter 6 Commissioning for the necessary settings 5 7 SD Card The SD card is used to store the event history of the system Touchpoint Pro logs all events and all changes to input readings A notification will be given when the SD card is 80 full If the card is not replaced a further notification will be given when it is full and when data is being overwritten Note A list of the events that are logged is given in Appendix 7 Events Caution The SD Card must remain inserted during normal system operation When the card is full it should be replaced immediately 5 8 Interfaces The Control Module has several communication interfaces e 10 100 Mbps Ethernet port for connection to a local network to enable the Web Server function and optional PC Configuration Software e Connections for the optional dual RS485 Modbus RTU interface e A USB port for connection to a USB flash drive which can be used to save reports backup and restore configuration and update software firmware and the sensor catalogue Note The USB Device port is not EMC safe and is to be used for maintenance mode only The USB Host port can take a USB flash drive which can be left in place provided that it does not foul the cables or cabinet
134. below Please be aware that the weight may vary depending on the options selected Approximate Weight in kg Hazardous Area Enclosure 31 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 3 Mechanical Installation 3 4 Floor Standing Enclosures Caution The Touchpoint Pro enclosure is heavy refer to table of typical weights Before lifting the enclosure consider and implement control measures to reduce the risk of injury Refer to local safety regulations Caution To prevent the floor standing enclosure toppling over it must be mechanically secured in place either bolted through the plinth to the floor or bolted to a suitable wall structure Caution Do not block any vents if fitted The typical weights of the floor standing enclosures are shown in the table below Please be aware that the weight may vary depending on the options selected Description Approximate Weight in kg FS cabinet 2000 x 800 x 600 Front Access No ventilation i w FS cabinet 2000 x 800 x 600 Front Access Natural ventilation FS cabinet 2000 x 800 x 600 Rear Access Natural ventilation FS cabinet 2000 x 800 x 600 Rear Access Forced ventilation ne 201 ne ne ne 32 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 3 Mechanical Installation 3 4 1 Floor Standing Cabinet Front Access The front access floor standing cabinet is available in options with no ventilation natural ventilation or forced ventilat
135. breather devices must be suitably approved and must not reduce the IP rating or protection levels Items should not be used if there is a high risk of mechanical damage to the equipment or enclosure Cable gland plates or blanking plates must be installed using the supplied gaskets and metal fixings Failing to do so will invalidate the IP rating Access doors and entry points must not be opened when a flammable gas atmosphere is present Class 1 Div 2 Class 1 Zone 2 and Zone 2 ATEX Access doors and entry points must be kept closed when the system is energised in normal operation All equipment in this manual is rated to 2000 m 6562 ft altitude maximum For safety reasons this equipment must be operated by qualified personnel only Read and understand the Instruction Manual completely before operating or servicing the equipment MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 1 Safety and Information WARNINGS Touchpoint Pro systems may contain hazardous live terminals Appropriate precautions should be taken during operation installation and maintenance and servicing Specifically operators must have appropriate training and experience to be aware of the hazards to which they may be exposed and of measures to minimise risk to themselves or other people The protection provided by the equipment may be impaired if the equipment is used in a manner not specified or authorised by the manufacturer
136. c If the sensor catalogue is used a list of available gases Characters and ranges will be displayed for selection If copy channel is being used this value cannot be changed 201 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 15 Appendix 2 Configurable Parameter Reference Guide 15 2 3 Sensor Settings Access Level Administrator Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range Comment Gas Name Gas Maximum 10 Alphanumeric Characters Gas Unit FSD FSD Vol ppm ppb mA mV mg FSD Full Scale Deflection m3 LEL m or maximum 5 Alphanumeric LEL Lower Explosive Limit Characters LEL m LEL metres Bridge Current 200 mA 180 to 360 mA 15 2 4 Range Settings Access Level Administrator Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range Comment Signal Range Min 0 0 mV to 100 mV X1 Signal Range Min Electrical Input from Sensor Signal Range Max 100 5 mV to 300 mV X2 Signal Range Max Electrical input from Sensor Y1 Gas Range Min Gas Range Min 0 Sensor Unit specific Y2 Gas Range Max Gas Range Max 100 Sensor Unit specific Gas concentration y is calculated as follows y Y2 Y1 X2 X1 x X1 1 Note Signal Range Min and Max are over written during calibration and are then no longer editable 15 2 5 Display Settings Access Level Administrator Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range Comment
137. ciated with the Touchpoint Pro system should be isolated from other equipment cabling in particular any high voltage or high current cabling 50 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 4 Electrical Installation 4 8 Electrical Connections 4 8 1 Touchpoint Pro Power Supplies Caution TPPR power supplies are supplied already wired Do not modify any factory fitted cabling 4 8 1 1 120 W DC 24 V Power Supply Unit Note The power supply units are equipped with spring clamp terminals Figure 4 6 120 W PSU Label Purpose N AC Supply Neutral L AC Supply Line Earth Label Purpose DC Output V DC Output V DC Output V DC Output V DC OK Relay Contact DC OK Relay Contact 51 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 4 Electrical Installation 4 8 1 2 240 W DC 24 V Power Supply Unit Note The power supply units are equipped with spring clamp terminals Figure 4 7 240 W PSU Label Purpose N AC Supply Neutral L AC Supply Line Earth Label Purpose DC Output V DC Output V DC Output V DC Output V DC OK Relay Contact DC OK Relay Contact 52 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 4 Electrical Installation 4 8 1 3 480 W DC 24 V Power Supply Unit Note The power supply units are equipped with spring clamp terminals F
138. cludes Controller with HMI PCBs TPPR HF F LRMXXF rol Centre Board Modbus Interface Board w o HON Logo forced ventilation Forced ventilation without plinth without power distribution SD Card Redundant Con Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs TPPR HF FS LXXHXF Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs D Card forced ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF FS LRXHXF D Card Redundant Con oor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs rol Centre Board forced ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF FS LXMHXF oor Standing Cabin D Card Modbus In O with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs erface Board forced ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF FS LRMHXF istribution oor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs trol Centre Board Modbus Interface Board forced ventilation w o power TPPR HF FS LXXXXF a oor Standing Cabin D Card w o HON Log forced ventilation w o power distribution ith Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs TPPR HF FS LRXXXF D Card Redundant Con oor Standing Cabinet with Front Access
139. configure the Touchpoint Pro Modbus communication parameters follow the procedure below If not already logged in login with a valid engineer level user name From the System Status screen select the Extras icon then Global Settings Select Modbus Settings then Edit to adjust the parameters PO Po When complete press Save Access Level Engineer Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range Comment Baud Rate 9600 9600 19200 Should be set to correspond to the baud rate of the host system Parity None Even Odd None Should be set to correspond to the parity checking set on the host system Primary Slave Address 1 1 to 247 Each node connected to the RS485 highway Secondary Slave Address 2 1 to 247 must have a different address setting Touchpoint Pro Modbus communication uses 8 data bits and 2 stop bits 185 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoin t Pro Operating Instructions 14 Appendix 1 Modbus Option 14 4 Register Allocation for Function 02 Read Input Status This function reads the input channel status bits Each status bit can have the value 1 Active or 0 Not active For the Channel Type only 1 Analogue or 0 Digital There are twelve status bits for each channel The maximum number of status bits read in one frame is 512 Input channels Channel Rate LTEL STEL Alarm3 Alarm 2 Alarm 1 Inhibit Fault No Channel not SIL Channel Safe State Warning
140. considerations There is a range of wall floor and rack mounted enclosures available for Touchpoint Pro When choosing a location for the Touchpoint Pro Controller or Remote type consider the following e Touchpoint Pro is specified for operation in ambient temperatures from 40 C to 65 C I O Modules or 20 C to 55 C Touchpoint Pro Controller However the upper ambient temperature may be reduced dependant on the type and quantity of installed components It is the user s responsibility to check the equipment rating plates for the true ambient range of the installation Operation of the unit outside of this temperature range invalidates the warranty and certification e All enclosures and racks have individual Ingress Protection and type ratings It is the user s responsibility to check rating plates for requirements e Only Zone 2 Div 2 and remote units can be installed outside in unprotected locations See Chapter 10 Specifications for further details e The Touchpoint Pro enclosures should be protected from direct sunlight where exposure could cause the unit temperature to rise beyond the specified operating limits e Ensure that there is sufficient clearance to mount the wall mounted enclosure and open the door A clearance of 100 mm all round plus space for cable entries is required The door hinge is on the left side Beware of proximity to entries exits and sloping ceilings Beware of siting in vehicle movement areas
141. creen F Three Core Cable with Screen and Armour with Screen Earthed at Controller Junction r and Armour Earthed in Field I awa Box ff i Sensor Incoming Client Earth Figure 4 5 Screened cable with armour wire or braid with metal junction box and or sensor e The armour must be connected to Protective Earth and the screen should be connected to the Touchpoint Pro enclosure s common earth ground rail e The metal sensor junction box must be connected to Protective Earth e The armour would typically be connected through a metal cable gland to a metal JB or controller enclosure but great care must be taken to avoid ground loops by preventing the armour coming into contact with either the enclosure or the cable screening 4 7 EMC RFI Considerations For installations in Europe all electrical equipment connected to the system should comply with the EMC Directive 2004 108 EC For non European installations electrical equipment connected to the system should comply with applicable national or international EMC standards All external and field cables connected to the Touchpoint Pro system must be screened in order to ensure correct operation of the system and to meet European Standards for RFI and EMC The cable screen should be properly terminated to earth at one end only the Touchpoint Pro side to avoid earth loops All screens should be terminated at the instrument earth bar provided in the enclosure External cabling asso
142. cted from stray or induced current especially if you are re using existing cables with a new Touchpoint Pro installation 3 2 Wall Mounted Enclosures There are a range of wall mounted enclosures available for Touchpoint Pro small medium and large mild steel versions 27 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 3 Mechanical Installation Correct Incorrect Figure 3 1 Touchpoint Pro wall mounting brackets orientation Caution The Touchpoint Pro enclosure is heavy refer to table of typical weights single person lift is not recommended Before lifting the enclosure consider and implement control measures to reduce the risk of injury Refer to local safety regulations Caution The Touchpoint Pro wall mounting brackets must always be installed in a vertical orientation as shown Fixing bolts should be of minimum diameter 8 mm to a depth of minimum 50 mm Caution It is the installer s responsibility to select the appropriate fixings taking into account the structure of the mounting surface and the weight of the enclosure The typical weights of the wall mounted enclosures are shown in the table below Please be aware that the weight may vary depending on the options selected Description Approximate Weight in kg 600 x 600 x 300 WM steel enclosure Local 600 x 600 x 300 WM steel enclosure Remote 800 x 600 x 300 WM steel enclosure Remote 800 x 600 x 300 WM steel enclosure Local 1200 x 800 x 3
143. d During configuration 1 Retry the operation the CCB was unable to 2 If the error has not cleared if possible cycle the write a value into the power to the system non volatile memory 3 If the problem persists please contact your local service representative 17 Operation failed invalid module Please refer to error 2 Please refer to error 2 identifier 18 Operation failed invalid channel Please refer to error 2 Please refer to error 2 identifier 133 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 9 Problem Solving Error Message Possible Cause Remedial Action Code 19 Operation failed invalid physical Please refer to error 2 Please refer to error 2 channel number 20 Module ID could not be assigned Each module on the Select a different Module ID because it is already in use by system must have a another module unique module ID e g M03 21 Operation failed wrong number of Please refer to error 2 Please refer to error 2 parameter identifiers 22 Not used 23 Operation failed Module ID does not May occur during 1 Re initialise the ring network exist configuration or 2 Retry the operation changeover of a module 3 If the error has not cleared if possible cycle the power to the system 4 If the problem persists please contact your local service representative 24 1 0 Module cannot be All channels of a 1 De commission all channels on the I
144. d 105 C The maximum cable length between the Battery Box and the UPS is 5 m Bootlace ferrules must be used on all terminations 46 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 4 Electrical Installation 4 4 Cabling Requirements Additional information for assembly by system integrators 4 4 1 24 Vdc Power Controller For the 24 Vdc power cabling the following power cabling specification is required e 2 wire cable e Diameter appropriate to the current load TB1 on the Control Module will accept a maximum wire size of 1 5 mm The power connector to the DIN rail will accept a maximum wire size of 6 mm e Shielded 4 4 2 Internal network connections Please refer to the Ring Network cable recommendations given above 4 5 Ring Network Distance Restrictions The total round trip distance of the Touchpoint Pro network must not exceed 3 km 1 86 miles The distance between individual Touchpoint Pro units e g between a Controller and a Remote Unit must not exceed 1 km 0 62 miles Touchpoint Pro Controller Remote Touchpoint Pro Unit ot Max 1km us 8 Remote Touchpoint Pro Unit Remote Touchpoint Pro Unit Remote Touchpoint Pro Unit Figure 4 1 Max allowed cable distances 47 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 4 Electrical Installation 4 6 Earthing Note Earthing is known as Grounding in some countries WARNING All Touchpoint Pro eq
145. d screen should be connected to Earth tag bar bus bar provided in Touchpoint Pro enclosure 212 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 16 Appendix 3 Wiring Diagrams 16 3 AIM 4 20 mA with 3 Wire Device Powered by External Power Supply 24V DC Recommended Cable External 24V 2 Core Twisted Mesh Type GND Q Supply Shielded 1 5mm or 2 5mm AIM mA Module Oo A 24VDC 4 l SIG O Channel 2 5 l 1012 V O OVDC oe ee I Li I Li Li Li Li D eo Oo A 24VDC 7 l SIG Y Channel 3 8 l 101 0 V Notes 1 For all shielded cables shield screen should be connected to Earth tag bar bus bar provided in Touchpoint Pro enclosure 2 A separate enclosure provision should be considered for mounting of external power supply and its field wiring 213 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 16 Appendix 3 Wiring Diagrams 16 4 AIM 4 20 mA with 2 Wire Device Powered by External Power Supply Recommended Cable 2 Core Twisted Mesh Type P Shielded 1 5mm or 2 5mm Sal 2 Wire Detector _ _ lt T o gt to External 24V p Oo A 24VDC ow A 24VDC 4 l SIG O Channel 2 5 l l 1010 V ovDC Oe I l l l i I Nai ai dy Ja ot A 24VDC 7 l SIG O Channel 3 8 l i l 1010 V l ovDC Le 24VDC Notes 1 For all shielded cables shield screen should be connected
146. d the time of the alarm If more than one alarm level has been triggered on the same channel all alarm levels will be shown 100 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 7 Normal Operation 7 4 2 Acknowledge an active alarm Note The system can be configured so that the Accept button is password protected and requires a user to login minimum Operator access level via the touchscreen See Commissioning Buzzer Activation and Button Password Protection Note Accept and Acknowledge have the same meaning in this context An active alarm can be acknowledged in three ways 1 Press the Accept button on the front panel of the Touchpoint Pro Controller This will acknowledge ALL active events including faults and warnings 2 From the Inputs screen select the channel and press Acknowledge from the popup menu Note Operator access level is required This will acknowledge all active events for the channel 3 From the Active Events screen select the alarm and select Acknowledge from the popup menu This will acknowledge only the selected alarm When an alarm is acknowledged the buzzer will be silenced and the alarm will stop flashing Note The Accept button on the front panel of the Touchpoint Pro must be pressed for gt 0 5 s to take effect Note If a Relay Output channel has the Alarm Update function enabled the alarm will be ignored for the Cause and Effect matrix once it is acknowledged 7 4 3 Reset a latch
147. des and suggested steps for resolution 10 Specifications Specifications of all the component parts of Touchpoint Pro 11 Certification Details of the regulatory approvals of Touchpoint Pro 12 Ordering Information Part numbers for systems components and accessories 13 Warranty Statement Statement of warranty 14 Appendix Modbus Option How to install and operate the Modbus interface option 15 Appendix Configurable Definitions default values and available ranges of all I O Module configurable parameters Parameter Reference Guide 16 Appendix Wiring Diagrams Wiring diagrams for common sensor configurations 17 Appendix Abbreviations Definitions of abbreviations used in this document 18 Appendix User Interface Diagrams showing the structure of the user interface software Software Menu Structure 19 Appendix Icons List of Touchpoint Pro icons and their meaning 20 Appendix Events List of Events that are logged by Touchpoint Pro and their meaning 11 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 1 Safety and Information 1 2 Safety Hazards The following specific hazards are associated with the use of this equipment Danger Ignition Hazard The Touchpoint Pro Controller is NOT ATEX IECEx safe and it may only be installed in safe areas where there are no flammable atmospheres and no oxygen concentrations gt 25 v v O The Touchpoint Pro range includes a wall mounted enclosure that is certif
148. dule cannot be Please refer to error 79 Please refer to error 79 commissioned The maximum number of 32 Output Modules has already been commissioned on the system 81 Invalid test sequence CCB receives wrong Test Please refer to error 2 sequence for Relay tests 82 The user could not be added The user name must be Please choose a user name that meets the invalid user name Please choose a different user name and try again 4 to 20 characters long requirements and try again 139 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 9 Problem Solving Error Message Possible Cause Remedial Action Code 83 Kill Session denied Configuration User has attempted to Retry after the configuration restore operation is Backup Restore in Progress end a session for the PC completed configuration SW while a CCB configuration restore is in progress from the local touchscreen 84 Kill Session denied CCB Firmware User has attempted to Retry after the firmware download operation is update in Progress end a session for the PC completed configuration SW while a CCB firmware download is in progress from the local touchscreen 85 The controller needs a restart to A system error has Please cycle the power to the Touchpoint Pro system proceed further Please power cycle occurred that can only the controller and try again be cleared by a power cycle 86 System is running in test mod
149. e Termination On position according to the diagram and table below Carefully replace the cover on the Control Module refit and re tighten the three locknut screws Refit the cables Note The termination resistor should only be switched across a channel that forms the final node of an RS485 highway It is necessary to set both jumpers for the channel PL3 PL6 a Termination Off Termination On iA 2 2 a4 Termination On Termination Off Dy PL4 PL5 i Termination Off Termination On 2 2 ax Termination On Termination Off L Channel 1 TB5 Channel 2 TB6 14 7 Jumpers for the Termination Resistance default configuration Setting Channel 1 Channel 2 PL3 PL4 PL5 PL6 Termination ON 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 Termination OFF 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 14 2 6 Multi drop mode For a multi drop installation a maximum of 32 nodes 31 slave nodes plus one master node can be supported 184 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 14 Appendix 1 Modbus Option 14 3 Configuration Note It is recommended that the host computer is configured to provide at least two retries in the event of a communication frame loss with a minimum delay of 1 s between each poll and a minimum timeout of 2 s Refer to the documentation supplied with the host computer for details of its communication and Modbus configuration Touchpoint Pro Modbus communication uses 8 data bits and 2 stop bits To
150. e One of the three test 1 From the System Status screen select the modes is active and Extras icon then Diagnostics other operations 2 Press the Menu icon and from the popup menu are restricted or not choose to stop the test mode that is active permitted 87 Not used 88 Operation failed Save Calibration Touchpoint Pro was Please retry the operation Failed unable to save the sensor calibration 89 Operation failed Channel Wiring Touchpoint Pro cannot Check all field wiring to the sensor and correct any Fault detect that a sensor problems is connected to the channel 90 Operation failed Bead Fault Touchpoint Pro cannot Check all field wiring to the sensor It is possible read the bead current that the sensor has failed please refer to the from the connected mV manufacturer s instructions sensor 91 Operation failed system is running One of the three test 1 From the System Status screen select the in test mode modes is active and Extras icon then Diagnostics other operations 2 Press the Menu icon and from the popup menu are restricted or not choose to stop the test mode that is active permitted 92 Calculation error A calculation error Retry the calibration Ensure that the values for zero has occurred during calibration for example Zero and SPAN calibration done with the same gas input 140 and span gas are entered correctly MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 9 Problem
151. e 3 11 Rear Access Forced Ventilation i 36 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 3 Mechanical Installation 3 5 19 Rack mounted unit This module is designed to fit into an industry standard 19 rack with a height of 5U The dimensions of the 19 rack mounted unit Controller or Remote version are shown below all dimensions in mm 483 mm is 462 1 mm 0 o ab cst 4 D p E E in E o X 0 N og o 110 mm 135 mm E Cie Jib N 2 2 SSI Figure 3 12 19 Rack dimensions The weight of the unit is 10 kg 3 6 Panel Mount Controller This module is designed to be fitted into a custom panel It has a height of 5U The dimensions of the unit are given below all dimensions in mm 358mm 332 7 mm e Es D o QQ oi E o A 0 5 E 1 E m vt Ba 78mm oo E E me E m EN S Figure 3 13 Panel mount controller dimensions 37 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 3 Mechanical Installation The weight of the unit is 1 kg The dimensions of the required cut out for the panel are 368 mm W x 232 mm H A bezel mounting kit
152. e Menu icon w and select Clear Force 11 Repeat steps 7 10 as required to complete the channel test 12 Return to the Inputs screen and repeat steps 6 10 for the next channel 13 When the test is complete return to the System Status screen and select the Extras icon then Diagnostics 14 Press the Menu icon w and select Stop Configuration Settings Test 15 The system will show a confirmation message that it has returned to normal operation WARNING Ensure that the system is returned to normal operation once testing is complete 112 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 8 Maintenance 8 1 4 Cause and Effect Test Note Engineer access level is required During this test all field device inputs will be ignored by the Touchpoint Pro system The Cause and Effect matrix will be evaluated based on simulated input states and outputs will be generated Caution During the Cause and Effect Test outputs will be generated and relays will be activated To avoid any unwanted activation of output devices e g emergency deluge disconnect them before starting the test This test has two purposes 1 To verify that Cause and Effect matrix configuration is correct by forcing the state of the input channels to various combinations The activated de activated output channels corresponding to the forced state of input channels can be viewed on the touchscreen or the Web Server 2 To check that the output channels
153. e OFF down position 3 Connect the incoming cable from the UPS as follows UPS Battery Box Terminal Identification Terminal Identification Purpose Battery 1 DC Voltage Battery 3 DC Voltage Note The isolator is designed to be located in the centre of the DIN rail do not move it from this location 4 Connect the Touchpoint Pro Battery box to protective earth An earth stud M8 is provided for this purpose Refer to local or national codes of practice for equipotential bonding Honeywell Analytics recommends a minimum wire size of 6 mm 10 AWG 4 8 4 Analogue Input Module 4 20 mA Note The Analogue Input Module mA operates in current sink mode only Note Channel wiring is from left to right for terminals on the top and bottom of the module It is not possible to move a plug from top to bottom of a module after wiring Please ensure correct wiring by system verification tests See Commissioning First Time Switch On and Maintenance Testing the Touchpoint Pro System The Analogue Input Module mA AIM mA accepts 4 20 mA current source signals from field devices the module operates in current sink mode only The module can supply 18 32 Vdc 24 Vdc nominal to the field devices at a maximum current of 1 A per channel with the additional limitation that the total current drawn from the module must not exceed 2 A at 65 C ambient or 4 A at 55 C ambient
154. e Software The User Interface Software is accessible in three different ways by local touchscreen at the Touchpoint Pro Controller by Web Server and by the optional PC Configuration Software A detailed menu structure of the software is given in the Appendix User Interface Software Menu Structure Touchpoint Pro does not need a user licence but for security reasons the optional PC Config and Web Server software do Please contact your local Honeywell supplier or distributor to obtain a 12 month user licence They will need your Company details a valid e mail address and the serial number of the Touchpoint Pro system In return they will e mail you the licence token and details on how an authorised Honeywell Engineer can install it in the system and details on how to activate the licence on a maximum of five PCs You will be notified shortly before the expiry of your licence and you will have a short licence extension in which to renew the licence token if you want to Please note that expired licences do not stop Touchpoint Pro from working They will merely stop you operating it remotely and you will have to operate it from the touchscreen instead Please save your licence token carefully in case of a PC or system malfunction While replacement licences can be reissued or transferred to other PCs within the licence period lost tokens cannot be replaced and you will have to purchase a new 12 month one When renewing transferring y
155. e isolator switch is in the OFF down position 127 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 8 Maintenance 8 10 2 Routine maintenance e Visually inspect the Touchpoint Pro Battery Box and all cabling e Check for physical security cable damage or loose connections e Periodically check that the vents have not become obstructed If necessary vacuum to remove any debris WARNING The sealed batteries contain lead and acid Treat all damaged batteries and leaks as hazardous spills and dispose of the battery and contents as hazardous waste 8 10 3 Changing a fuse Caution To comply with regulatory requirements only use the specified replacement fuse 1 Ensure that the isolator switch is in the OFF down position 2 Undo the fuse holder by pushing the two sides together and twisting to release 3 Remove the blown fuse and insert a replacement of type Bussman 20 A Fast Acting 1 25 Type ABC 20 R 4 Push the two sides of the fuse holder together and twist to lock in place 5 Return the isolator switch to the ON up position 8 10 4 Replacement Batteries Caution Batteries should be load tested at frequent intervals and replaced if they cannot hold a stable current under load Caution To comply with regulatory requirements only use the specified batteries Replace faulty batteries with e FIAMM 12 V 12 Ah FG21202 part number TPPR V 0406 or e FIAMM 12 V 27 Ah FG22703 part number TPPR V 04
156. e simple to follow on the screen However Appendix 2 should be used as a reference for detailed definitions of all the parameters as well as the default settings and available ranges Caution It is important to understand the definition of a parameter to avoid unexpected or potentially unsafe behaviour of the system Please refer to the detailed definitions in the appendix regarding the meaning of a parameter 83 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 6 Commissioning 6 9 2 Configuring a Channel Note Have the configuration information to hand Note When you enter the System Setup menu a configuration timeout is active separate to the user login timeout If no values are sent to the system for 20 minutes you will be logged out of configuration If a first time channel configuration has not been completed all changes will be erased and the channel will be decommissioned To configure an individual channel If not already logged in login with a valid administrator level user name From the System Status screen select the Extras icon then System Configuration Re enter the password and press Login Select System Setup OV oP GOs IN ee The screen will show the system setup tree listing of all installed I O modules PSU Status Inputs and Control Centre Board s Press the beside each module to expand and show the four channels of that module Select the required channel press the Menu icon and select Comm
157. ear Force 106 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 7 Normal Operation 7 9 View Trend Graph The trend graph shows the history of the signal on an analogue input channel The signal value is logged when it changes or every one hour if there is no change Note Touchpoint Pro does not adjust automatically for daylight savings time Be aware that if the date and time are changed to a time in the past for example ending daylight savings time Touchpoint Pro will retain a backup of the previous data Note Touchpoint Pro logs the trend data point when the system is in Field Inputs Test Mode but does not log it when in the Configuration Settings Test or Cause and Effect Test modes Note The system logs when the value changes with a resolution determined by the gas range of the channel For a gas range of less than 10 the resolution is 0 01 for a gas range of 10 to 99 the resolution is 0 1 and for a gas range of 100 or more the resolution is 1 From the System Status screen navigation bar select the Inputs icon A list of all input channels is shown in order of channel ID Select the required channel and select Trend Graph from the popup menu The trend graph will be displayed g e O D z Use the forward and backward arrows to scroll through the graph Expand or reduce the axes using the X X Y and Y buttons If there are more data points than the number of pixels available on the scre
158. ear Thermoplastic Fusible element Visible Melting Description Type rt Amps Colour Backplanes Fuse 2 TAC ATO Blade 600 A s 20 Yellow Backplanes Fuse 3 TAC ATO Blade 600 A s 20 Yellow Backplanes Fuse 4 TAC ATO Blade 600 A s 20 Yellow Backplanes Fuse 5 TAC ATO Blade 600 A s 20 Yellow Backplanes Fuse 6 TAC ATO Blade 600 A s 20 Yellow CMA Light amp Fan Fuse 1 TAC ATO Blade 35 0 A s 5 Lt Brown CMA Light amp Fan Fuse 7 TAC ATO Blade 35 0 A s 5 Lt Brown CMA Light amp Fan Fuse 8 TAC ATO Blade 35 0 A s 5 Lt Brown UPS Fuse 0 Dual PSU single UPS setup TAC ATO Blade 600 A s 25 White 151 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 10 Specifications 10 5 Control Module and User Interface 10 5 1 Controller amp Remote Unit DC Input Supply Input Voltage DC 24 V nominal DC Input Voltage Range 18 32 VDC Supplied from Self Enclosed Low Voltage source only 10 5 2 Control Module an d User Interface Description Front panel User Interface Assembly Supply Voltage 18 32 VDC Supplied from Self Enclosed Low Voltage source only Power Consumption Maximum 13 W Ring Communication Physical layer Isolated RS485 Ring Network Cable Two x 1 mm twisted pair cable Relay Outputs Two x System State Relays Relay Contacts in 12 VDC 10 mA ax 5 A
159. ed alarm Note Operator access level is required optional see Commissioning Buzzer Activation and Button Password Protection Caution The Touchpoint Pro system is designed to alert the user to potentially dangerous events and to trigger protective measures It is the responsibility of the Operator to ensure that the site emergency response procedures are initiated before accepting alarms and that the danger has been investigated and cleared before resetting the alarms Alarms cannot be reset until the gas concentration is below the threshold limit An STEL Alarm can be reset if the current value of the time weighted average is below the alarm threshold Caution Resetting an LTEL Alarm has the effect of clearing the time weighted average calculation and starting again An LTEL Alarm can only be reset if the current gas reading is below the alarm threshold 101 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 7 Normal Operation A latched alarm can be reset in three ways 1 Press the Reset button on the front panel of the Touchpoint Pro This will reset ALL latched alarms faults and warnings provided that the event has cleared It will also reset any latched relay outputs 2 From the Inputs screen select the channel and select Reset from the popup menu This will reset all latched events for the channel provided that the input signal has returned to Normal status 3 From the Active Events screen select the ala
160. en Touchpoint Pro will by default display the maximum value within each set of points This is the MaxLine For example if one pixel needs to represent 12 seconds it will display the maximum value that occurred during those 12 seconds If you toggle to MinLine Touchpoint Pro will display the minimum value within each set of points Note The Web Server will by default display both MaxLine and MinLine This can be changed to show only MaxLine only MinLine or both 3 R o P a G jTrend Diagramm Oo o T i 08 10 2014 08 10 2014 03 10 2014 D8 1020t4 08 10 20 14 pamai OLLI O12739 O1s7BI Oiid 39 PASS 207539 zo i01 Channel i014 Gas Minne 1 Stunde 0 100 96 FSD MaxLine gt Figure 7 17 Trend Graph Screen 107 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 7 Normal Operation 7 10 View Event History The event history for the complete system can be viewed in date order latest first The history can be filtered by Alarm Fault Inhibit Warning All or by selecting a date range To access event history from the System Status screen navigation bar select Extras then Event History or in the Web Server directly select the Event History icon Note The event history time stamp is accurate to within 5 seconds Note Touchpoint Pro does not adjust automatically for daylight savings time Be aware that if the date and time are changed to a time in the past for example ending daylight savings time Touchp
161. er Consumption Maximum 1 W Power Dissipation Maximum 1 W Ring Network Cable Minimum 2 x 2 x 1mm2 twisted pair plus Drain and Overall Screen Operating Conditions Storage Temperature 40 C to 70 C 10 to 90 RH non condensing 40 C to 70 C Environmental Protection Class Equipment Class Ill Installation Cat 2 Pollution Degree 2 Connector Coding Ring cable connectors TB1 TB4 have coding keys to avoid incorrect wiring 10 4 4 Backplane Description 5 7 9 and 10 1 0 slot excluding first slot reserved for RCM backplane PCB for providing power and Ring Network connections to the RCM and I O modules Electrical Connection Two wire V and V at Power Supply Input for 5 7 9 1 0 Slot Backplane 2 x two wire V and V at Power Supply Input for 10 1 0 Slot Backplane 10 pin backplane connector for connection to RCM and I O Modules Maximum Wire Size 6 mm2 Supply Voltage 18 32 VDC Backplane current Rating Maximum 20 A Power Supply Connector Rating Maximum 32 V 41 A Backplane connector Maximum 32 V 4 04 A Environmental Protection Class Equipment Class Ill Installation Cat 2 Pollution Degree 2 Operating Conditions 40 C to 70 C 10 to 90 RH non condensing Storage Temperature 40 C to 70 C 149 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 10 Specifications 10 4 5 Power Supply Redundancy Module RDN Module To
162. er Rail e Release the clip at the bottom of the module e Ease the module outwards and unhook it from the top of the DIN rail Di 115 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 8 Maintenance Figure 8 1 Detaching a module 3 Fit anew module of the required type to the same slot on the Communication Power Rail e Ensure that the module is the correct way up with the label towards you e Hold the module at an angle with the plastic side top closest to the DIN rail e Hook the plastic side on to the edge of the DIN rail 116 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 8 Maintenance Figure 8 2 Attaching a module e Push the bottom of the module into place so that it clips onto the DIN rail Caution Clipping the module to the DIN rail should not require any force If the module does not clip easily check that it is correctly aligned to the connector on the DIN rail Figure 8 3 Clip the module into place 117 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro 0 OO a 9 10 11 12 13 Operating Instructions 8 Maintenance Re connect the field equipment by plugging the field terminals into the new module If not already logged in login with a valid administrator level user name From the System Status screen select the Extras icon then System Configuration Re enter the password and press Login Initialise the Ring Network Both the newly inserted module and the old
163. er with HMI PCBs SD Card w o HON Logo natural ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF FS LRXXXN Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board w o HON Logo natural ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF FS LXMXXN Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Modbus Interface Board w o HON Logo natural ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF FS LRMXXN Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs rol Centre Board Modbus Interface Board w o HON Logo natural ventilation Natural ventilation wit h plinth SD Card Redundan ventilation Con TPPR HF F LXXHPN Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card with 100mm plinth natural ventilation TPPR HF F LRXHPN Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board with 100mm plinth natural ventilation TPPR HF F LXMHPN Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Modbus Interface Board with 100mm plinth natural ventilation TPPR HF F LRMHPN Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI
164. es gaz inflammables Classe 1 Div 2 Classe 1 Zone 2 et Zone 2 ATEX Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class 1 Div 2 Class 1 Zone 2 and Zone 2 ATEX non incendive approval WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD AVERTISSEMENT RISQUE D EXPLOSION Substituer des composants peut compromettre la conformit de la Classe 1 Div 2 Classe 1 Zone 2 et de la Zone 2 ATEX pour l approbation de produits non inflammables WARNING Wiring to and from this enclosure must utilise wiring methods suitable for Class 1 Div 2 Class 1 Zone 2 and Zone 2 ATEX Hazardous Locations as appropriate to the installation AVERTISSEMENT Le c blage de ce bo tier doit respecter les m thodes d installation appropri es en ce qui concerne les zones dangereuses de la Classe 1 Div 2 de la Classe 1 Zone 2 et de la Zone 2 ATEX 146 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 10 Specifications WARNING Do not disconnect terminals or remove modules when energised Class 1 Div 2 Class 1 Zone 2 and Zone 2 ATEX AVERTISSEMENT Ne pas d connecter les terminaux ou supprimer les modules lorsque l appareil est sous tension Classe 1 Div 2 Classe 1 Zone 2 et Zone 2 ATEX This wall mounted enclosure is certified for use in hazardous areas locations Class 1 Div 2 Class 1 Zone 2 and Zone 2 ATEX This enclosure can only be used as a remote unit due to its classification and no User Interface o
165. g until it is stable and then press Accept Confirm that the reading is zero and press Save then OK Select Span Adjust Enter the equivalent concentration of span gas that can be generated by the sensor preferably 100 FSD 20 mA and press Accept When ready press OK and generate an equivalent gas reading at the sensor preferably by forcing the output to 20 mA View the signal reading until it is stable and then press Accept 13 14 15 Confirm that the reading is correct and press Save then OK Return the sensor to normal operation and confirm that the signal has returned to zero Select Clear inhibit to remove the inhibit from the channelNote Please read the chapter User Interface before proceeding 91 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 7 Normal Operation 7 1 Safety Function During normal operation e The Touchpoint Pro system will collect data every 250 ms from all of the Input Output modules on the Ring Network e The Cause and Effect matrix will be evaluated every 250 ms and commands sent accordingly to the appropriate output channels System response time is lt 1 s e Any change in status of an I O channel will be reported to the User Interface and logged in the event history e Any occurrence of any of the events listed in Appendix 7 will be reported to the User Interface and logged in the event history e Any fault or inhibit within the system will activate the Sys
166. gin with the default Administrator level details supplied with the system Press the Login icon padlock in the navigation bar and a prompt will appear for the User Name and Password From the System Status screen select the Extras icon then Global Settings then Regional Settings Set the date time and time zone as required Select the language required English default French German Spanish Italian Dutch or Russian Press Save oa FO DY If the time zone or language has been changed the User Interface software will reboot to apply the new settings Note During the restart of the User Interface software the Touchpoint Pro system remains available 76 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 6 Commissioning 7 Otherwise use Back and Home to return to the System Status screen Note Touchpoint Pro does not adjust automatically for daylight savings time Note If the date and time are changed to a time in the past for example ending daylight savings time Touchpoint Pro will retain the backup of previous data but this backed up data will not be available in the generated reports In the current version there is no provision to check or get the data back and generate the report though the data is available in backup 6 4 Program Users and Passwords The Touchpoint Pro is supplied with a default Administrator login and password attached to the touchscreen For security reasons at least one new Adminis
167. hing a module e Push the bottom of the module into place so that it clips onto the DIN rail Caution Clipping the module to the DIN rail should not require any force If the module does not clip easily check that it is correctly aligned to the connector on the DIN rail 119 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 8 Maintenance Figure 8 5 Clip the module into place If not already logged in login with a valid administrator level user name From the Home screen select the Extras icon then System Configuration Re enter the password and press Login Initialise the Ring Network The newly inserted module will appear in the System Setup Tree Select the new module and commission it pl p OY ge Qi Commission each channel in turn Note See the chapter Commissioning for detailed instructions if required 8 6 How to Remove or Decommission an I O Module WARNING If the relays are switching mains voltages hazardous live terminals may be present within the Relay Output Module even if the Touchpoint Pro system is isolated Caution When installing or replacing an I O module avoid static discharge Note Administrator level access is required If not already logged in login with a valid administrator level user name From the System Status screen select the Extras icon then System Configuration Re enter the password and press Login PONS In the System Setup Tree highlight the module to be removed a
168. ibution 2x 20A PSU 2x UPS RDN TPPR W 040 3 2x20A Fault Tolerant Power Distribution 3x 20A PSU 2x RDN TPPR W 040 4 2x 20A Fault Tolerant UPS Power Distribution 8x 20A PSU 3x UPS 2x RDN TPPR W 060 1 3x 20A Power Distribution 3x 20A PSU 2x RDN TPPR W 060 2 3x 20A UPS Power Distribution 8x 20A PSU 3x UPS 2x RDN TPPR W 060 3 60A Fault Tolerant Power Distribution 4x 20A PSU 2x RDN TPPR W 060 4 60A Fault Tolerant UPS Power Distribution 4x 20A PSU 4x UPS 2x RDN TPPR W 080 1 80A Power Distribution 4x 20A PSU 2x RDN TPPR W 080 2 80A UPS Power Distribution 4x 20A PSU 4x UPS 2x RDN TPPR W 080 3 80A Fault Tolerant Power Distribution 5x 20A PSU 3x RDN TPPR W 080 4 80A Fault Tolerant UPS Power Distribution 5x 20A PSU 5x UPS 3x RDN TPPR W 100 1 100A Power Distribution 6x 20A PSU 3x RDN TPPR W 100 2 100A UPS Power Distribution 5x 20A PSU 5x UPS 3x RDN TPPR W 100 3 100A Fault Tolerant Power Distribution 6x 20A PSU 3x RDN 175 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 13 Honeywell Analytics Product Warranty Honeywell Analytics warrants the TouchPoint Pro system against defective parts and workmanship and will repair or at its discretion replace any components that are or may become defective under proper usage within 24 months from the date of shipment from Honeywell Analytics This warranty does not cover consumable
169. ice manual All sensor field cables must be screened in order to ensure correct operation of the system and to meet European Standards for RFI and EMC Ensure that the maximum loop resistance is not exceeded as specified by the device manufacturer Take account of voltage drops due to line resistance to ensure that the correct voltage level is present at the field device as specified by the device manufacturer The I O modules will accept wire sizes to a maximum of 2 5 mm 4 3 3 Power Supplies Power supplies can be in the range 100 240 Vac 50 60 Hz single phase or 24 Vdc nominal 18 32 Vdc Use approved supply wiring rated in accordance with the rating plate on the specific system in accordance with local and national regulations The Touchpoint Pro power supplies will accept wire sizes in the range 0 5 6 mm solid wire 0 5 4 mm stranded wire or 20 10 AWG 4 3 4 Bus interfaces Please refer to the appropriate appendix 4 3 5 Ethernet Ethernet cable must be CAT5e or CAT6 Ethernet cable terminated to TIA EIA 568B standard The cable should have shielded RJ45 plugs with the shield of the cable connected to the metal body shield of the connector plug The cable length should not exceed 100 m The Ethernet cable should be fitted through a gland 4 3 6 Touchpoint Pro Battery Box The cable between the Touchpoint Pro System UPS and the Touchpoint Pro Battery Box must be 4 mm UL CSA approved wiring material tri rate
170. ied as ATEX IECEx Zone 2 Class Div 2 and Class Zone 2 safe but this enclosure can only be installed as a remote unit ATEX certified components may be used within the Touchpoint Pro and these bear the ATEX imprint shown to the left Warning Lethal Voltage present All power supplies must be hard wired and must include a circuit breaker RCD RCCB and close by and unobstructed a means of manually isolating and locking out the power supply without breaking the true earth ground connection Removable plug and socket connection is not permitted under any circumstance Warning Lethal Voltage present Lethal voltage may be present in this equipment when electrical power is applied There is a danger of death or injury from electrical shock Isolate power before opening electrical access panels Ensure residual current is fully discharged before touching live terminals Warning Lethal Voltage present Lethal voltage may be present both internally and externally to the system All installations including cabinets racks and remote units must be connected to true earth and must be capable of staying earthed grounded when the power supply is interrupted The Protective Earth Ground symbol is shown on the left and it always has a green background Do not confuse it with the chassis earth symbols shown below it Warning Toxic Waste and Harmful By products Toxic waste and harmful by products may accumulate within
171. igure 4 8 480 W PSU Label Purpose N AC Supply Neutral L AC Supply Line S Earth Label Purpose DC Output V DC Output V DC Output V DC Output V DC OK Relay Contact DC OK Relay Contact 53 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 4 Electrical Installation 4 8 2 Power Redundancy Module Failure Monitor 24V 20A DC OK Qs 20 241 Power Supply OK QS 20 241 Power Supply Redundancy Module Figure 4 9 Power Redundancy Module Label Purpose Input 1 DC Supply 1 V Input 1 DC Supply 1 V Input 2 DC Supply 2 V Input 2 DC Supply 2 V Output DC Output V Output DC Output V 54 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 4 Electrical Installation 4 8 3 DC UPS and Battery Box The DC UPS connections are as follows Terminal Identification Label Purpose DC Supply V Input DC 24 V DC Supply V DC Supply V spare V Supply to Touchpoint Pro system Output DC 24 V 20 A V Supply to Touchpoint Pro system Battery Battery Battery The UPS is equipped with status relays as follows Terminal Identification Label Purpose 1 Contact is closed when both batteries are P Ready charged all OK 3 Contact is closed when UPS has switched j Buffering to battery power
172. il this is done Caution Gas readings may be generated during this procedure Disable or inhibit any operations or actions that may result from gas readings before starting this test Note Engineer level access is required Note If you wish to enable a calibration reminder for the channel please edit this setting before starting cali bration see Commissioning Editing a Configured Channel and Configurable Parameter Reference Guide Calibration Reminder Settings For catalytic bead type detectors the Touchpoint Pro Analogue Input Module forms part of the measuring circuit Therefore all commissioned mV channels remain in Inhibit state until they are calibrated Touchpoint Pro monitors the ageing of catalytic bead detectors and can provide a warning when a sensor should be replaced Please select First Span when calibrating a new or replacement sensor for the first time and Span for all calibrations thereafter When the sensitivity of the sensor has dropped below 50 of the original value a Sensor Lifetime Expired warning will be generated during calibration Caution If First Span is not used the system will compare the sensitivity of the sensor to the default value of 50 mV This may result in the Sensor Lifetime Expired warning being generated prematurely or not at all To calibrate a mV input channel please follow the procedure below in combination with the relevant instructions in the sensor manual 89 MANO923_Is
173. instellungen e S Installation system ior TCP IP Einstellungen e CCB Verwaltung Modbus Settings Modbus e Benutzer Verwaltung B Einstellungen A e Bedienfeldkonfiguration e Regionale Einstellungen Komponenten Update Fortsetzung in Men System Konfiguration f r lokale Benutzeroberfl che und PC Konfigurationssoftware y Siehe Datenblatt Kalibrierung der lokalen y y y y y y y Benutzeroberfl che Service Contact TCP IP Einstellungen Modbus Einstellungen Bedienfeldkonfiguration Regionale Einstellungen Komponenten Update System ID Settings ae Zugriff auf Optionen B ONNE O oy SETENTA B e Zeit f r Hintergrundbeleuchtung e Sprachwahl E SEE E EEU System ID lt Eingabe gt Servicekontakt Netzwerkstatus Baudrate Ausschaltzeitpunkt Datums Uhrzeiteinstellungen Aktualisierung des Sensorenkatalogs System ID lt Bestatigung gt Einstellungen IP Adresse e Paritat Kennzeichnung f r den Zweck des Zeitzone Webserverzertifikat Update e Subnetzmaske shes Sees e Webserverzertifikat entfemen 7 FAEN O AEE e Prim re Slave Adresse SE e cone atl e IP Adresse des Druckers e Secondary Slave Address oie Kundensiandor E r jede Option e Telefonnummer des Technikers Sekund re Slave Adresse e Hardware Version e Zu installierende Version der neuen i Komponente anzeigen
174. ion Code 39 Operation failed wrong alarm Please refer to error 38 Please refer to error 38 identifier 40 Flash erase operation failed The CCB was unable to 1 Retry the operation erase a value from the 2 If the error has not cleared if possible cycle the non volatile memory power to the system 3 If the problem persists please contact your local service representative 41 Not used 42 Operation failed maximum file size An error occurred during 1 Check that the correct file is being used for the exceeded firmware software update restore operation Refer to the Touchpoint update or configuration Pro users support website for latest update versions backup restore 2 Retry the operation 3 If still unsuccessful on the front panel press the Accept and Reset buttons together for 10 s which will restart the COB 4 Retry the operation 5 If the error has not cleared if possible cycle the power to the system 6 If the problem persists please contact your local service representative 43 Operation failed file ID mismatch Please refer to error 42 Please refer to error 42 firmware update failed 44 Operation failed file block out of Please refer to error 42 Please refer to error 42 sequence firmware update failed 45 Operation failed invalid file block Please refer to error 42 Please refer to error 42 size firmware update failed 46 Operation failed CRC mismatch Please refer to error 42 Please refer to error
175. ion The dimensions are shown below all dimensions in mm Front View Right View 611 2121 So 1 PLINTH Ce 802 iz Figure 3 6 Front Access No Ventilation 33 Touchpoint Pro MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Operating Instructions 3 Mechanical Installation Front View Right View 611 A 22 g i oD ie g 3 o PLUNTH p 802 iz Figure 3 7 Front Access Natural Ventilation Front View Right View 611 A 29 g i 2143 i PLINTH 802 tf Figure 3 8 Front Access Forced Ventilation 34 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 3 Mechanical Installation 3 4 2 Floor Standing Cabinet Rear Access The rear access floor standing cabinet is available in options with no ventilation natural ventilation or forced ventilation The dimensions are shown below all dimensions in mm Front View Rear View Right View 611 2121 T Eg D am 2 E PLINTH PLINTH i 802 ra Figure 3 9 Rear Access No Ventilation Front View Rear View Right View 611 2143 a fate fee PLINTH PLINTH 802 ia Figure 3 10 Rear Access Natural Ventilation 35 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 3 Mechanical Installation Right View Front View Rear View 611 2143 Cie 8 0 Oo oO pone PLINTH l PLINTH 802 Figur
176. ioning 6 1 Introduction 6 2 First Time Switch On 6 3 Set Date Time and Language 6 4 Program Users and Passwords 6 5 Setup Web Server 6 5 1 TCP IP Settings 6 5 2 Internet Explorer 8 Settings 6 5 3 Windows Settings 6 6 Setup PC Configuration Software optional 6 7 Verify Default Configuration and Program Tags 6 8 Commission Input Output Modules 6 9 Channel Configuration 6 9 1 Introduction 6 9 2 Configuring a Channel 6 9 3 Editing a Configured Channel 6 9 4 Removing an I O Module Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 6 10 6 11 6 12 6 13 6 14 6 15 6 16 6 17 Contents Commission Power Supply Unit Status Channels Redundant Control Centre Board Configuration Buzzer Activation and Button Password Protection Touch Panel Configuration 6 13 1 Calibrate touch panel Service Contact Settings Back up Configuration Calibrate mV input channels Calibrate mA input channel loops Normal Operation 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 7 7 7 8 7 9 7 10 7 11 7 12 7 13 7 14 7 15 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 7 8 8 Safety Function Overview Touchscreen Interface 7 2 1 System Status screen 7 2 2 Navigation Inputs and Outputs Screens 7 2 3 Navigation Active Events 7 2 4 Login Overview Web Server Interface 7 3 1 Start the Web Server 7 3 2 System Status Screen 7 3 3 Navigation Inputs and Outputs Screens 7 3 4 Navigation Active Events 7 3 5 Navigation
177. is completed Note Touchpoint Pro will prompt for a configuration back up after any configuration parameter is changed Note The USB Device port is not EMC safe and is for maintenance use only To back up the configuration Ensure that the SD Card is inserted in the Control Module USB Host Port If not already logged in login with a valid engineer level user name From the System Status screen select the Extras icon then System Configuration ONS Re enter the password and press Login 88 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 6 Commissioning Select CCB Management and click on Configuration Backup The system will display a message The configuration backup process might take a few minutes The Local UI is not accessible during this time Do you want to proceed 7 Once the action is confirmed the configuration backup process starts and a progress message is displayed The backup may take several minutes depending on the system size 8 The Configuration backup file is stored on the SD Card in Hard Disk Touchpoint Pro Configuration Touchpoint ProConfig bin Note Touchpoint Pro always uses the same filename for configuration backups therefore it is recommended that a dated copy of the backup file is kept in another location 6 16 Calibrate mV input channels WARNING Channel calibration is compulsory after changing the bead current of an AIM mV channel and the channel stays in Inhibit unt
178. is only applies for the transition normal o active Hold Time 00m 00s 00m 00s to 60m 00s The output module wil set the output channel into normal condition after the Hold Time interval has expired This only applies for the transition active to normal and only if the output is configured as non latching Auxiliary Output Overload Disabled Enabled Disabled lf enabled the system will report any auxiliary output overload as a fault The overload condition applies to the module so it will be reported on all enabled channels 209 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 15 Appendix 2 Configurable Parameter Reference Guide Alarm Update Disabled Enabled Disabled lf enabled only unacknowledged alarm conditions will be Enable considered during C amp E evaluation for this output channel An alarm acknowledgement will reset a relay output that is configured for alarm update function However if the alarm update is NOT enabled the relay contact will only be reset if the alarm is reset Action on New Steady Steady Pulsed Event 15 4 3 Cause and Effect Type Selection A Relay Output channel can be configured as a Master relay which activates if any specific condition is present anywhere in the system e g Alarm 1 or as a Normal relay which activates according to the programmed Cause and Effect matrix for th
179. ische Anzeige Navigationsleiste Lokale Benutzeroberflach e und Webserver Navigationsleiste WebServer Globale Einstellungen Systemkonfiguration e _ Servicekontakt Einstellungen e System Installation TCP IP Einstellungen i e CCB Verwaltung Modbus Settings Modbus e Benutzer Verwaltung Einstellungen Bedienfeldkonfiguration Regionale Einstellungen Komponenten Update System ID Fehleranzahl f r E A Module ersion der lokalen Benutzeroberflache Fortsetzung in Men System Konfiguration fur lokale Benutzeroberflache und PC Konfigurationssoftware Siehe Datenblatt Legend System Booting Local UI Screen for Booting Screen for Visualisation System Configuration Screen for Configuration COB and Touch Panel Settings Local UI PC Configuration Software Screen not required for WebServer or JOL Benutzeroberfl che Kalibrierung der lokalen y Daten des Servicetechnikers Bearbeiten Daten des Servicezentrums Bearbeiten Service Contact Settings Servicekontakt Netzwerkstatus e Baudrate Ausschaltzeitpunkt sere e Datums Uhrzeiteinstellungen e Aktualisierung des Sensorenkatalogs ser e System ID lt Bestatigung gt Einstellu ngen IP Adresse e Parit t e Kennzeichnung f r den Zweck des e Zeitzone e Webserverzertifikat Update Subne
180. ission Channel Caution The I O Module will be set into Configuration State if configuration is attempted for any of its channels either Commission Channel or Edit Configuration Configuration State means that all commissioned channels on the I O Module are set into Inhibit state input channels will not trigger any alarms and output channels will not execute any actions There are several ways by which a channel can be configured Analogue Input channels only e Select from Sensor Catalogue Basic All relevant configuration parameters are loaded automatically from the Sensor Catalogue for the selected field device and sensor e Select from Sensor Catalogue Extended All relevant configuration parameters are loaded automatically from the Sensor Catalogue for the selected field device and sensor The user has to run through the full configuration sequence in order to verify or modify each proposed parameter value All channels e Copy from a Configured Channel All relevant configuration parameters are loaded automatically from a previously configured channel of the same type e Configure a Custom Channel The user enters all configuration parameters 8 Select the required configuration method and follow the on screen instructions Refer to the Appendix Configurable Parameter Reference Guide for detailed information 84 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 6 Commissioning 6 9 3 Editing a Configured
181. istory data is flushed from the internal memory to the SD Card To ensure that event history is maintained on one SD Card and minimise loss of event history data during updates please eject the SD Card from the Touchpoint Pro copy any required files and replace it in the system as soon as possible If a different SD Card is used some event history data may be saved to the second card and will no longer be accessible from the Touchpoint Pro To back up the configuration Ensure that the SD Card memory device is inserted in the Control Module If not already logged in login with a valid engineer level user name From the System Status screen select the Extras icon then System Configuration Re enter the password and press Login Select CCB Management and click on Configuration Backup Select the required drive PY MOD IOT SP De DN The system will display a message The configuration backup process might take a few minutes The User Interface is not accessible during this time Do you want to proceed Please ensure that source drive is always connected during the operation 8 Once the action is confirmed the configuration backup process starts and a progress message is displayed The backup may take several minutes depending on the system size 9 The Configuration backup file is stored on the memory device in SD Card Drive TPPR Configuration TPPR_Config_SystemID bin To restore the configuration 1 Make sure that the backup SD
182. ive is DIM cleared Input Force Cleared 233 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 20 Appendix 7 Logged events and where they are displayed Displayed ee F Specific Event Comment Input Output Active inputs Channel Type Details Details Events Outputs if applicable screen screen screen screen UI SW Update Logged when local HMI is updated Local HMI Functional Logged when Local HMI System Status screen is shown this indicates Local HMI is functional Local HMI Login Logged when user logs in from HMI Local HMI Logout Logged when user logs out from HMI Local HMI OFF TBC Local HMI ON TBC LTEL Alarm Y Y Y mA LTEL Alarm Acknowledged mA LTEL Alarm Cleared mA mA Configuration State Inhibit Channel is in Inhibit because the mA module is being configured mA Configuration State Inhibit mA cleared mA Fault Recovery Inhibit Channel is in inhibit because a mA fault recovery delay time has been configured mA Fault Recovery Inhibit mA cleared mA module inhibited channel mA mA User Inhibit Channel has been inhibited by the mA user mA User Inhibit cleared mA Modbus Update Logged when modbus application is updated Module Configuration Modified Module Fault Acknowledged for All Module Fault Cleared for All Module Fault for All Module ID assigned Module Inhibit Cleared M
183. l 540mm for Standard Cabinet versions TPPR V 0707 DIN Rail Blank Panel 205mm for Standard Cabinet versions TPPR V 1270 Blank Gland Plate for 6 00Wx300D Wall Mount enclosure versions TPPR V 1271 Gland Plate with standard knock outs for 600Wx300D Wall Mount enclosure versions TPPR V 1272 Gland Plate with custom knock outs for 600Wx300D Wall Mount enclosure versions TPPR V 1275 Blank Gland Plate for 800Wx300D Wall Mount enclosure versions TPPR V 1276 Gland Plate with standard knock outs for 800Wx300D Wall Mount enclosure versions TPPR V 1277 Gland Plate with custom knock outs for 800Wx300D Wall Mount enclosure versions TPPR V 1280 Blank Gland Plate for Stainless Steel Div2 Zone2 510Wx300D enclosure TPPR V 1285 Blank Gland Plate for 800Wx600D Floor Standing Cabinets TPPR V 1290 Mild Steel Viewing Window for all Standard Wall Mount Controllers and Floor Standing cabinet versions IP54 RAL 7035 TPPR V 1291 Plinth 100Hx800W for Floor Standing Cabinet TPPR V 1292 Plinth Sides 100Hx600D for Floor Standing Cabinet TPPR V 1293 Mild Steel Bezel with PUR Gasket 227Hx288W 162 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 12 Ordering Information TPPR V 121 1 Mounting plate Blank 600Hx600W Mild Steel TPPR V 1221 Mounting plate blank 800Hx600W Mild Steel TPPR V 1231 Mounting plate blank 1200Hx800W Mild Steel TPPR V 1267 Mounting plate blank 2000Hx800W Mild Steel
184. l Mild Steel Mild Steel Dimensions H x W x D 600 x 600 x 300 mm 800 x 600 x 300 mm 1200 x 800 x 300 mm Weight 37 Kg 46 Kg 81 Kg Operating Conditions 20 to 55 C T 0 100 RH condensing Power Supplies 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 0 20 A max 24 VDC Nominal 18 32 VDC 0 80 A max Pmax See Rating Plate 145 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 10 Specifications 10 2 2 Wall Mount Remote Unit Enclosures without User Interface These units are IP 66 Type 4 amp 12 Class 1 grounded and can be installed indoors or outdoors in a Pollution Degree 4 environment and can be exposed to rain snow and direct sunlight The upper T may be reduced dependent on internal power dissipation See Rating Plates for details Part Number TPPR V 1215 TPPR V 1225 Material Mild Steel Mild Steel Dimensions H x W x D 600 x 600 x 300 mm 800 x 600 x 300 mm Weight 37 Kg 46 Kg Operating Conditions 20 to 65 C T 0 100 RH condensing 40 to 65 C T modules only Power Supplies 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 0 20 A max 24 VDC Nominal 18 32 VDC 0 80 A max Pmax See Rating Plate 10 2 3 Hazardous Area Remote Unit Enclosure without User Interface WARNING SS Do not open when a flammable gas atmosphere is present Class 1 Div 2 Class 1 Zone 2 and Zone 2 ATEX AVERTISSEMENT Ne pas ouvrir l quipement dans des atmospheres contenant d
185. l inhibit resets This is a warning message to notify the user that the the STEL time weighted STEL calculation is resetting average calculations 204 Gas calibration failed module in When fault recovery or Wait for the delay time to expire and then retry the recovery state power on inhibit delay calibration is in progress for a channel and calibration is attempted 255 Operation failed Please retry the operation If the problem persists please contact your local service representative 400 Unknown error code received from Please retry the operation If the problem persists CCB Please retry the operation If please contact your local service representative the problem persists please contact your local service representative 9 3 Further Assistance If the problem is still unresolved please contact Honeywell Analytics technical support using the contact details at the back of this manual Please have the following information to hand e A description of the problem including the steps taken to try to resolve it e The serial number of the Touchpoint Pro system If possible please also locate the following information by selecting Extras Help then About e CCB firmware version e COB firmware version e Local UI version e WebServer version e Modbus version if applicable Note see also Certification for additional information 143 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 10 Specificati
186. l not 1 Check the Active Events screen for details of the Ring Network is interrupted Please allow you to initialise the location of the connection break check the Ring Network wiring as network if a ring break is 2 Check the cables and connections in the area explained in the user manual and present where the connection break fault is indicated also retry the initialisation once the see Error 37 interruption is rectified 3 Ensure that details of the Ring Network break error have gone from the Active Events screen problem is resolved 4 Return to the System Setup screen and retry the Ring Initialisation operation 69 Not used 138 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 9 Problem Solving Error Message Possible Cause Remedial Action Code 70 Cannot clear Inhibit because A mV input channel has 1 For a mV channel calibrate the channel see the channel has been inhibited not yet been calibrated Commissioning Calibrating a mV input channel automatically or channel configuration 2 If this is not the cause go to System was interrupted or the Configuration then System Setup inhibit delay time is 3 Select the module with the inhibited channel and active or the sensor select Normal State transmitter is signalling 4 If this is not successful go to Extras then Event inhibit History to check if an Inhibit Delay Time i
187. lanalytics com Contact Honeywell Analytics Europe Middle East Africa Life Safety Distribution AG Javastrasse 2 8604 Hegnau Switzerland Tel 41 0 44 943 4300 Fax 41 0 44 943 4398 gasdetection honeywell com Customer Service Tel 00800 333 222 44 Freephone number Tel 41 44 943 4380 Alternative number Fax 00800 333 222 55 Middle East Tel 971 4 450 5800 Fixed Gas Detection Middle East Tel 971 4 450 5852 Portable Gas Detection Americas Honeywell Analytics Inc 405 Barclay Blvd Lincolnshire IL 60069 USA Tel 1 847 955 8200 Toll free 1 800 538 0363 Fax 1 847 955 8210 detectgas honeywell com Asia Pacific Honeywell Analytics Asia Pacific 701 Kolon Science Valley 1 43 Digital Ro 34 Gil Guro Gu Seoul 152 729 Please Note K While every effort has been made to ensure accuracy in this publication orea no responsibility can be accepted for errors or omissions Data may change a as well as legislation and you are strongly advised to obtain copies of the most Tel 82 0 2 6909 0300 recently issued regulations standards and guidelines This publication is not Fax 82 0 2 2025 0328 intended to form the basis of a contract India Tel 91 124 4752700 analytics ap honeywell com Technical Services Honeywell EMEA HAexpert honeywell com US ha us service honeywell com AP ha ap service honeywell com Issue 3_10 2015 13033_H_MANO923_EMEA 2400M2501 A04701 www honeywell com 2015 Honey
188. lect the Inputs icon and if appropriate the Outputs icon 2 Select the required channel and select Inhibit from the popup menu 3 To clear an inhibit select the required channel and select Clear Inhibit from the popup menu Note An auto inhibit cannot be cleared manually Auto inhibits occur for example when a mV input channel has been configured but not yet calibrated when a transmitter is signalling Inhibit or when an Inhibit delay time is running Please refer to Chapter 9 Problem Solving for details 103 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 7 Normal Operation Note When you manually place an Output Relay into Inhibit it holds the Relay in the current state l e if the Relay is in a Normal Healthy state at the time of inhibit it stays in that state and if the Relay is in an Alarm Non Healthy state at the time of inhibit it stays in that state An Alarm state cannot be over ridden by an inhibit of the output Relay It is possible to have more than one inhibit condition active on a channel and you have to resolve all inhibit conditions before the inhibit can be cleared Tnhibit Input Details Trend Graph Gas Calibration View Signal Figure 7 12 Inputs Screen with menu options 7 7 View Input Channels and Input Details Note In the Touchscreen view the Inputs and Outputs icons toggle from the System Status screen navigation bar only the In
189. ludes HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board w o HON Logo TPPR HW S LXMXXX Wall Mount Controller 600Hx600Wx300D includes HMI PCBs SD Card Modbus Interface Board w o HON Logo TPPR HW S LRMXXX Wall Mount Controller 600Hx600Wx300D includes HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board Modbus Interface Board w o HON Logo TPPR HW S RXXHXX Wall Mount Remote Unit GOOHx600Wx300D w o HMI PCBs SD Card TPPR HW S RXXXXX Wall Mount Remote Unit 60OHx600Wx300D w o HMI PCBs SD Card w o HON Logo TPPR H Medium Wall Mount Enclosures TPPR HW M LXXHXX Wall Mount Controller 800Hx600Wx300D includes HMI PCBs SD Card TPPR HW M LRXHXX Wall Mount Controller 800Hx600Wx300D includes HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board 163 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 12 Ordering Information Modbus Interface Board w o HON Logo TPPR HW M LXMHXX Wall Mount Controller 800Hx600Wx300D includes HMI PCBs SD Card Modbus Interface Board TPPR HW M LRMHXX Wall Mount Controller 800Hx600Wx300D includes HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board Modbus Interface Board TPPR HW M LXXXXX Wall Mount Controller 800Hx600Wx300D includes HMI PCBs SD Card w o HON Logo TPPR HW M LRXXXX Wall Mount Controller 800Hx600Wx300D includes HMI PCBs
190. m the System Status screen select the Extras icon then System Configuration 3 Re enter the password and press Login 4 Select CCB Management then CCB Configuration Access Level Administrator Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range Comment Buzzer Activation Threshold Alarms Only Buzzer Off Threshold Alarms Only All Determines the activation condition Alarms Only All Events All Alarms for the buzzer Faults Inhibits and Warnings Password Protection for Disabled Enabled Disabled If enabled Operator level access Accept Button is required to acknowledge active events using the Accept button on the front panel Password Protection for Enabled Enabled Disabled If enabled Operator level access is Reset Button required to reset active events using the Reset button on the front panel 6 13 Touch Panel Configuration To access the panel configuration 1 If not already logged in login with a valid engineer level user name 2 From the System Status screen select the Extras icon then Global Settings 3 Select Panel Configuration Access Level Engineer Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range Comment Backlight Duration 15 minutes 10 seconds to 60 minutes This is the time that the backlight will remain on after the Always On touchscreen is idle If a new event occurs the backlight will come on and will remain on as long as the event remains unacknowledged Purpose of the
191. mary in User Interface Access Levels 3 If necessary Create a new user with the appropriate access level 35 The Username Password is incorrect Please refer to error 34 Please refer to error 34 please try again 36 Access denied your current access Please refer to error 34 Please refer to error 34 level does not allow the intended operation 37 Ring communication failed please There is an issue 1 If the error occurred during normal operation check proper ring network wiring with the ring network i e not configuration check the Active Events and try again connection screen for details of the location of the connection break or Check the LEDs on each Ring Coupling Module RCM in the system The LED indicates that data is being received therefore if an LED is not lit there is a problem in the preceding section of the ring network 2 Check the cables and connections in the area where the connection break fault is indicated 38 System interaction command failed An error occurred during 1 Retry the operation please try again the system interaction 2 lf the error has not cleared if possible cycle the power to the system 3 If the problem persists please contact your local service representative 135 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 9 Problem Solving Error Message Possible Cause Remedial Act
192. minal Block X None T Terminal Blocks y TPPR M H A A A A A A A A A s X TPPR M 8 Way Communication Power Rail Select up to maximum 8 I Os R H Consists of a DIN Rail blank panel 2 x Ring Coupling Modules 1x DIM and 8 Backplanes with additional Ring Coupling Module for redundant communications and additional DIM for remote PSU failure monitoring Input and Output Modules 1 0 Module X None A Analogue Input Module mV Bridge C Analogue Input Module 4 20mA H Digital Input Module N Relay Output Module Customer Set up D Default S Custom Optional Terminal Block X None T Terminal Blocks TPPR M R H A A A A A A A A S X 159 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 12 Ordering Information 12 2 Touchpoint Pro Control System Part Number Generator Touchpoint Pro Control System Part Number Generator TPPR S 19 Rack controller or Remote Unit RL 19 Rack 5U Controller includes HMI PCBs SD card RR 19 Rack 5U Remote Unit without HMI PCBs SD card Redundant Control Centre Board Select if a dual redundant system is required X None R Yes for TPPR S RL selection only Bus Interface
193. mit LTEL Alarm Settings Caution The Touchpoint Pro LTEL calculation assumes an 8 hour working period In some countries the use of STEL and LTEL alarms with fixed gas detection equipment is not recommended Refer to local and national regulations Note The Long Term Exposure Limit LTEL calculation is a moving time weighted average TWA over an 8 hour time interval The sample interval is 30 s and the LTEL reading is updated every 10 minutes 195 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 15 Appendix 2 Configurable Parameter Reference Guide LTEL TEN_MIN_TWA1 TEN_MIN _TWA2 TEN_MIN_TWAN LTELN Where LTEL Long Term Exposure Limit TWA TEN_MIN_TWA1 1st Ten Minute TWA TEN_MIN_TWA2 2nd Ten Minute TWA TEN_MIN_TWAN Nth Ten Minute TWA LTELN Number of Ten Minute TWA Samples received in 8 hours Access Level Engineer Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range LTEL Alarm Enable Disabled Enabled Disabled LTEL Alarm Level 10 FSD According to sensor range LTEL Alarm Latch Latching Latching Non Latching 15 1 13 Rate Alarm Settings 1 Note The Rate of Change Alarm is set when a specific rate of rise or fall depending if the Rate Alarm Trigger is set as Rising or Falling is observed The Alarm Level and the Alarm Interval can be configured If the Alarm Level 10 LEL and the Alarm Interval 5 s the Rate Alarm will be set if the concentration
194. mment Calibration Reminder Enable Disabled Enabled Disabled Calibration Overdue Warning is set if the Calibration Reminder Interval is exceeded Calibration Reminder Interval 6 months 1 to 24 months Calibration reminder is calculated to the day e g if the reminder is set on 27 January for 6 months time the calibration overdue reminder will appear on 27 July 198 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 15 Appendix 2 Configurable Parameter Reference Guide 15 1 19 Calibration Signal Settings Access Level Engineer Note These settings refer to the range of signal values from the sensor over which calibration will be permitted and are used to avoid incorrect calibration e g due to incorrect application of gas Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range Comment Maximum Zero Offset 5 mA 1 to 15 mA During calibration the Zero Signal Too High warning is set if the Zero signal exceeds the Maximum Zero Offset Minimum Zero Offset 3 mA 1 to 8 mA During calibration the Zero Signal Too Low warning is set if the zero signal is below the Minimum Zero Offset Maximum Span Signal 20 0 mA 8 0 to 24 0 mA During calibration the Calibration Signal Too High warning will be set if the span signal exceeds the Maximum Span Signal Minimum Span Signal 5 mA 0 0 to 12 0 mA During calibration the Calibration Signal Too Low warning will be set if the sp
195. n Certificates Remote Wall Mount Zone 2 Div 2 Enclosure and ROM ATEX IECEx II 3G Ex nA nC IIC T4 Ge ROM Tamb 40 C to 70 C Enclosure Tamb 40 C to xx C xx is dependent on customisation see Rating Plate CSA US CAN Class Div 2 ABCD T4 Class Zone 2 AEx nA nC IIC T4 Class Zone 2 Ex nA nC IIC T4 ROM Tamb 40 C to 70 C Enclosure Tamb 40 C to xx C xx is dependent on customisation see Rating Plate AIM mA AIM mV DIM RCM and Backplanes a II 3G Ex nA IIC T4 Ge Class Div 2 ABCD T4 Class Zone 2 AEx nA IIC T4 Class Zone 2 Ex nA IIC T4 Tamb 40 C to 70 C AIM mA SIRA 15ATEX4028U IECEx SIR15 0015U CSA 70004992 AIM mV SIRA 15ATEX4029U IECEx SIR15 0016U CSA 70025468 DIM SIRA 15ATEX4030U IECEx SIR15 0017U CSA 70025478 ROM SIRA 15ATEX4031U IECEx SIR15 0018U CSA 70025950 RCM SIRA 15ATEX4032U IECEx SIR15 0019U CSA 70025951 Backplanes SIRA 15ATEX4033U IECEx SIR15 0020U CSA 70025953 Remote Wall Mounted Zone 2 Div 2 Enclosure SIRA 15ATEX4034X IECEx SIR15 0021X CSA 70030437 156 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 11 Certification Touchpoint Pro is a fully customizable installation so it is not possible to certify all of the possible variations in one guide Instead each purchased system will have its personalized parameters inscribed on
196. n the top and bottom of the module It is not possible to move a plug from top to bottom of a module after wiring Please ensure correct wiring by system verification tests See Commissioning First Time Switch On and Maintenance Testing the Touchpoint Pro System Terminal Identification Label Channel Field device 1 S Input 1 Sensitive 2 01 Signal 3 NS Non sensitive 4 S Input 2 Sensitive 5 01 Signal 6 NS Non sensitive 7 S Input 3 Sensitive 8 01 Signal 9 NS Non sensitive 10 S Input 4 Sensitive ii 01 Signal 12 NS Non sensitive 60 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 4 Electrical Installation Catalytic Detector Figure 4 15 Catalytic detector 4 8 6 Digital Input Module Touchpoint Pro _ Note Channel wiring is from left to right for terminals on the top and bottom of the module It is not possible to move a plug from top to bottom of a module after wiring Please ensure correct wiring by system verification tests See Commissioning First Time Switch On and Maintenance Testing the Touchpoint Pro System DIMs have two modes of operation A DIM channel may be configured to generate an alarm fault or warning signal when activated Alternatively a DIM channel may be configured to provide remote control of a selected group of one or more input output channels The DIM may
197. nal Range Max 20 mA 12 mA to 24 mA X2 Signal Range Max Electrical input from Sensor Y1 Gas Range Min Gas Range Min 0 Sensor Unit specific Y2 Gas Range Max Gas Range Max 100 Sensor Unit specific Gas concentration y is calculated as follows y Y 2 Y1 X2 X1 X X1 1 15 1 5 Display Settings Access Level Administrator Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range Comment Peak Hold Enable Disabled Enabled Disabled If Peak Hold is enabled and the gas reading rises above the configured full scale value the channel will display the maximum gas reading that has been measured until it is reset Note The number of decimal places to be displayed is determined by the Gas Range Max setting as follows Gas Range Max Decimal Places gt 100 0 gt 10 and lt 99 1 lt 10 2 This is also the resolution at which data will be logged for the trend report 193 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 15 Appendix 2 Configurable Parameter Reference Guide 15 1 6 Suppression Settings Access Level Engineer Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range Comment Zero Suppression Positive 0 0 0 to 25 0 FSD Zero Suppression Negative 0 0 0 to 25 0 FSD The gas concentration shall be set to 0 0 when the gas concentration value received from the sensor is between the Zero suppression Positive and Ze
198. nalogue Input Module 4 20mA Digital Input Module A C H N Relay Output Module Customer Set up D Default S Custom Optional Terminal Block X None T Terminal Blocks 9 Way Communication Power Rail Select up to maximum 9 I Os R Consists of a DIN Rail blank panel 2 x Ring Coupling Modules and 9 Backplanes with additional Ring Coupling Module for redundant communications Input and Output Modules 1 0 Module X None A Analogue Input Module mV Bridge C Analogue Input Module 4 20mA H Digital Input Module N Relay Output Module Customer Set up D Default 2 S Custom Optional Terminal Block X None i T Terminal Blocks TPPR M R A A A A A A A S X 158 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 12 Ordering Information TPPR M 9 Way Communication Power Rail Select up to maximum 9 1 0s H Consists of a DIN Rail blank panel 1 x Ring Coupling Module 1 x DIM and 9 Backplanes with additional DIM for remote PSU failure monitoring Input and Output Modules 1 0 Module X None A Analogue Input Module mV Bridge C Analogue Input Module 4 20mA H Digital Input Module N Relay Output Module Customer Set up D Default S Custom Optional Ter
199. nd expand to show its channels 120 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 8 Maintenance Highlight each channel in turn and select Decommission from the popup menu Once all channels are decommissioned highlight the module and select Remove Module from the popup menu 7 If still connected disconnect the field equipment from the faulty module by unplugging the field terminals 8 Remove the faulty module from the Communication Power Rail e Release the clip at the bottom of the module e Ease the module outwards and unhook it from the top of the DIN rail Figure 8 6 Detaching the module 121 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 8 Maintenance 8 7 Backup Restore configuration Note Engineer access level is required to back up the configuration Administrator access level is required to restore configuration Note The Touchpoint Pro system remains available during this procedure It is recommended to back up the Touchpoint Pro system configuration once it is completed and following any changes to the setup or software Note The SD Card fitted in the Touchpoint Pro Controller is used for logging event history When the SD Card is removed data is logged in internal memory To avoid potential loss of event history data please minimise the length of time that the SD Card is removed from the system Note When the command Eject SD Card is used the event h
200. ng surface should be flat and strong enough to bear the weight of the Touchpoint Pro system Drywall plasterboard dry lined or timber framed type construction is not considered to be a suitable structural material unless strengthened with additional supports or braces and or special fixings Take account of the contents and external cabling in addition to the weight of the unit itself e The Touchpoint Pro Battery Box should have a clearance of 200 mm to either side and there should be no heat sources below or adjacent to the unit e Ensure access to disconnecting device switch inside the enclosure 3 7 2 Installation and Assembly Due to regulations on shipping batteries which are classified as hazardous goods it is not possible to ship the Touchpoint Pro Battery Box as a complete assembly It is necessary to fit the batteries into the enclosure and fit the connecting cables supplied For safety reasons it is recommended that the 17 Kg batteries are installed after mounting the housing on the wall Caution The batteries within the Touchpoint Pro Battery Box have a limited storage life Please ensure that the Battery Box is connected and charged within 3 months of delivery 3 7 2 1 Mounting the Touchpoint Pro Battery Box to a wall Caution The assembled Touchpoint Pro Battery Box is heavy gt 25 kg or gt 15 kg single person lift is not recommended Before lifting the enclosure consider and implement control measures to reduce the
201. nnel Tag Name B 104 Read Gas Unit B Response formats for the Result String registers 40n06 40n36 n 0 to 9 Type Format A Float 4 Bytes 32 bit floating point B Unicode String 35 Unicode chars 1 null Example Read Alarm 1 level Query Type Register Block Channel Type Channel ID Query Type Result 40n05 Result String 40n06 to Active 40n02 40n03 40n04 40n36 40n01 Value 1 105 2 39 Updated upon request Updated upon request execution execution If Block Active is set to 1 the Controller processes the request If Block Active is set to 0 the Controller will not process the request or has already processed the request The options for Channel Type are 105 Input Channel and 111 Output Channel 189 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 14 Appendix 1 Modbus Option 14 6 3 Command Poll Registers Command Poll Block Active Channel Type Channel ID Command Type Command Data Result Block 1 41001 41002 41003 41004 41005 41006 2 41101 41102 41103 41104 41105 41106 3 41201 41202 41203 41204 41205 41206 4 41301 41302 41303 41304 41305 41306 5 41401 41402 41403 41404 41405 41406 6 41501 41502 41503 41504 41505 41506 7 41601 41602 41603 41604 41605 41606 8 41701 41702 41703 41704 41705 41706 9 41801 41
202. nput Module 4 20 mA AIM mA 4 channel Analogue Input Module for 2 or 3 wire 4 20mA detector signals Analogue Input Module mV Bridge AIM mV 4 channel Analogue Input Module for mV Bridge signals powers up to 4 catalytic flammable gas detectors Digital Input Module DIM 4 channel Digital Input Module for switched input devices such as manually operated push buttons Can also be used for remote alarm acknowledge reset and output inhibit Relay Output Module ROM 4 channel Relay Output Module incorporating 4 SPCO relays suitable to activate field mounted annunciators Note Communication Power Rails may be included in the system without any I O Modules however there is a limit of 5 such Communication Power Rails within the full 3 km loop of the system 2 7 System Interaction The User Interface consists of e Interface software with three ways to access Touchscreen for normal system operation maintenance and configuration Web Server for remote access to view normal system operation PC Configuration Software optional for convenient system configuration e Accept and reset buttons on the front panel of the Touchpoint Pro Controller e Power Alarm Fault and Inhibit LEDs on the front panel of the Touchpoint Pro Controller e Buzzer on the Touchpoint Pro Controller Further System Interfaces consist of e Two master relays System Failure and System Fault e Connections for SD Card and USB memory device e 10 100 Mb
203. ns 2 Overview Introduction 2 1 Touchpoint Pro Touchpoint Pro is a control system for Honeywell Analytics and third party range of sensors which provides alarm evaluation and logically connectable relay outputs for alarm annunciation or control equipment operation Any system can be built from just four main building blocks 1 A control module with colour LCD touch screen User Interface 2 Plug in Input Output I O modules 3 A backplane power and communications highway 4 Power Supplies These basic components can be mounted in cabinets or racks or a combination and the I O modules freely mixed and matched in any combination From small scale systems to large fully integrated gas fire and shutdown systems Touchpoint Pro has the flexibility to meet all your gas and fire safety system control requirements The heart of Touchpoint Pro is the Controller which includes the User Interface The User Interface features a full colour liquid crystal display LCD with touch screen and provides engineers with an intuitive solution to system set up and deployment Touchpoint Pro System Key Components Remote Unit GB Remote Unit Controller with User Interface e A _ A adt eee 8 Input and Output Modules Communication Power Rail Power Supply Units mVandmA Relay Output Digital Input 120W 24Vde 240W 24 Vdc 480W 24 Vdc Analogue Module Module PSU PSU PSU Input Modules i i Redundancy UPS Figure 2
204. nsor f the gas response in chapter 6 using the First Span function falls below 50 of the original value this error Occurs 56 Entered span gas concentration is The span gas selected is 1 Check the configured limits for span gas out of range please edit and try not within the configured concentration again limits 2 Obtain an alternative span gas that is within the limits 3 Retry the operation 57 Operation failed invalid object type There has been a 1 Please retry the operation communication error between the CCB and COB 2 If still unsuccessful on the front panel press the Accept and Reset buttons together for 10 s which will restart the COB 3 If the error has not cleared if possible cycle the power to the system 4 If the problem persists please contact your local service representative 137 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 9 Problem Solving Error Message Possible Cause Remedial Action Code 58 Operation failed CRC calculation There has been a file 1 Please retry the operation timeout transfer error between 2 If still unsuccessful on the front panel press the the CCB and COB Accept and Reset buttons together for 10 s which will restart the COB 3 If the error has not cleared if possible cycle the power to the system 4 If the problem persists please contact your local service rep
205. nt re calibrate the 4 20 mA loop by forcing the sensor output to 4 mA then 20 mA see Commissioning Calibrating a mA input channel mA input channel Error Calibration Signal Too High occurs when calibrating the mA loop The parameter Maximum Span Signal has been exceeded default value 20 mA Edit the configuration of the channel Go to System Configuration then System Setup Select the channel and select Edit Configuration Under Calibration Settings change the value Maximum Span Signal Alternatively use a lower forced mA value to calibrate the channel mA Input channel Fluctuating input signal HART communication with the corresponding field device HART communication with the field device may appear as a fluctuation on the incoming signal This will clear when HART communication ceases Modbus No Modbus Communication Check the wiring between the Control Module terminal blocks TB6 and TB7 and the host computer system port Try swapping over TDA and TDB Check that the serial communication configuration parameters of the host computer system and Touchpoint Pro are the same Ensure that the bus is correctly terminated If this is the case remove the bus terminators and retry communication Consider adding network bias resistors Please refer to Appendix 1 Modbus Operation for further details Modbus Communication data errors Check the data signal wiring is not
206. nt Pro Operating Instructions 3 Mechanical Installation 3 3 Hazardous Area Enclosure Caution The Touchpoint Pro enclosure is heavy refer to table of typical weights single person lift is not recommended Before lifting the enclosure consider and implement control measures to reduce the risk of injury Refer to local safety regulations The Touchpoint Pro range includes a wall mounted enclosure which is certified for use in hazardous areas locations ATEX IECEx Zone 2 Class Div 2 and Class Zone 2 This enclosure can only be used as a remote unit no controller option is available 510 ja 325 oi 1 SS Sie Bg Te ie en ee Pe ol 2 l I I Lr l I l I Hl i I o l I l l eji o H o 8 oF SEN y l ig o He l l l HE o o l l l I l l o o l o R Ci IR la oll 011 Fe 7 i ed el Ne ee J L 4 ae ge E 560 _ B 590 zi Figure 3 5 Touchpoint Pro Hazardous Area Enclosure Fixing bolts should be of minimum diameter 8 mm to a depth of minimum 50 mm Caution It is the installer s responsibility to select the appropriate fixings taking into account the structure of the mounting surface and the weight of the enclosure The typical weight of the hazardous area enclosure is shown in the table
207. o indicate that the safety function of the system is not operating In addition a Test Mode Fault will be shown as an Active Event on the User Interface which cannot be reset Once a test mode is active the system will remain in test mode until the test is exited The only exception is in the case of a power cycle of the Touchpoint Pro system when it will restart in normal mode Cause and Effect Test inputs can be forced and cleared from any output in that Test Note After 20 minutes of inactivity the system will always logout the user and return to the System Status screen however it is still running in test mode 110 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 8 Maintenance The optional PC Configuration Software cannot be used while a test mode is active All events generated while the system is in test mode will be logged in the event history Therefore a record of the testing can be generated once it is complete see Normal Operation Generate Reports 8 1 2 Field Inputs Test Note Engineer access level is required During this test all field device inputs will be displayed by the Touchpoint Pro system but the Cause and Effect matrix will not be evaluated No outputs will be generated The purpose of this test is to check that the input field devices are connected to the correct input channel of the Touchpoint Pro system Typically this can be done either by applying gas to the sensor in the field o
208. o section 6 8 Initialise Ring Network Unconfigured Modules F lt Channel Location Tag M E S Channel Fey Oaai Module Type Unconfigured Channel Number Configured i Channel FE Unique Device gt Identifier UDID Figure 6 4 System Setup Data 6 8 Commission Input Output Modules Note Administrator level access is required If not already logged in login with a valid administrator level user name From the System Status screen select the Extras icon then System Configuration Re enter the password and press Login Select System Setup Or Ne oS If this is a first time configuration the system will indicate that the Ring network must be initialised Press the Ring Network icon 2 to initialise the network manually 6 The screen will display the System Setup tree list of all Input Output modules PSU Status Inputs and Control Centre Board s installed on the system The modules are displayed in the order left to right on the communication power rail looking at the rail and in the direction of Ring A round the complete system if remote units are being used Select the required module press the Menu icon bad gt and select Commission Module Select a module ID number between 1 and 48 the default is the next available number and press Send to send it to the system 9 The system will then return the value which will be displayed on the screen Confirm that it is correct and press Accept f
209. o units Controller or Remote of 1 km 2 5 Communication Power Rail and Ring Network The Touchpoint Pro Communication Power Rail directly provides power and network connection to the I O modules minimising the wiring required There is a single connection for the 24 Vdc supply which is then distributed to the I O modules The network cables connect to the Ring Coupling Module which handles the communication between the modules and the Control Centre Board The Communication Power Rail is available in three lengths suitable for 5 7 9 or 10 I O modules The choice of length may be restricted by the size of the selected power supply option Touchpoint Pro Controller PSU RCM Input Modules Output Modules Communication Control Centre Board COB Board CCB Actuator Field Devices Gas Detectors Fig 2 3 Touchpoint Pro Controller The Ring Network is the communication link between all I O modules in a Touchpoint Pro system and the Control Centre Board The Ring Network is the only connection required between a Touchpoint Pro Controller containing the Control Module and User Interface and Remote Touchpoint Pro units The Ring Network is implemented for redundancy as two loops transmitting in opposite directions Ring A and Ring B The network is self healing since each module only communicates with the one next to it If a module fails the modules after it continue to transmit data in the direction away from
210. o ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF RS LRMHPX Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board Modbus Interface Board with 100mm plinth w o ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF RS LXXXPX Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D i w o HON Logo with 100mm plinth w o ventilation w o power d cludes Control istribution er with HM PCBs SD Card TPPR HF RS LRXXPX F R d oor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D i istribution cludes Control edundant Control Centre Board with 100mm plinth w o HON Logo w o venti er with HM lation w o power PCBs SD Card TPPR HF RS LXMXPX F TPPR HF RS LRMXPX F oor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Control Modbus Interface Board with 100mm plinth w o HON Logo w o ventilation w o power distribution oor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Control er with HM er with HM PCBs SD Card PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board Modbus Interface Board with 100mm plinth w o HON Logo w o ventilation w o power distribution Natural ventilation without plinth TPPR HF R LXXHXN Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card natural ventilation TPPR HF R LR
211. oard forced ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF RS LXMHXF Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Modbus Interface Board forced ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF RS LRMHXF Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board Modbus Interface Board forced ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF RS LXXXXF Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 12 Ordering Information TPPR HF RS LRXXXF oor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card F Redundant Control Centre Board w o HON Logo forced ventilation w o power distribution F oor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Modbus Interface Board w o HON Logo forced ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF R LRMXXF Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board Modbus Interface Board w o HON Logo forced ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF RS LXMXXF Forced ventilation with plinth TPPR HF R LXXHPF Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HM
212. odule Removed Module Replaced mV Auto Inhibit mV channel has been configured mV but not yet calibrated mV Auto Inhibit cleared mV 234 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 20 Appendix 7 Logged events and where they are displayed Displayed w F Specific Event Comment Input Output Active Inputs Channel Type Details Details Events Outputs if applicable screen screen screen screen mV Configuration State Inhibit Channel is in Inhibit because the mV module is being configured mV Configuration State Inhibit mV cleared mV Fault Recovery Inhibit Channel is in inhibit because a mV fault recovery delay time has been configured mV Fault Recovery Inhibit mV cleared mV module inhibited channel TBC mV mV module Inhibited channel mV Cleared mV User Inhibit Channel has been inhibited by the mV user mV User Inhibit Cleared mV New I O Channel added All New I O Module detected Y Open Circuit TBC Y mV Open Circuit Cleared mV Output Active ROM channel output active A ROM Output Active Forced ROM channel output has been ROM forced to activate Output Deactive Forced ROM channel output has been forced to deactivate Output Forced ROM channel output has been Y ROM forced to activate Output Verification Error TBC Output Active Force Cleared ROM Output
213. oint Pro will retain a backup of the previous data 7 11 Generate Reports Several reports can be generated from the Touchpoint Pro system Reports can be saved to a memory device or printed The report is generated as a Comma Separated Value csv file e Trending for a specific channel date range is selectable e Channel events for a specific channel date range is selectable e Configuration for a specific channel e All events within a selectable date range e Calibration Report e System Configuration Report To access reports 1 From the System Status screen navigation bar select Extras then Report 2 Select the type of report required and if applicable select the channel required Note The Save Print option is disabled until a channel is selected 3 Select required start and end dates and times 4 Select Save or Print as required Note The Web Server will automatically open the report in Microsoft Excel if installed or in a text editor Microsoft Excel 2003 is limited to a maximum of 65 526 entries If the report is larger than this a message file not loaded completely may be generated Microsoft Excel 2010 has a much larger capacity which should be sufficient for all Touchpoint Pro generated reports Note Touchpoint Pro does not adjust automatically for daylight savings time Be aware that if the date and time are changed to a time in the past for example ending daylight savings time Touchpoint Pro will retain a b
214. oller with HMI PCBs SD Card Modbus Interface Board w o HON Logo natural ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF RS LRMXXN Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board Modbus Interface Board w o HON Logo natural ventilation w o power distribution Natural ventilation with plinth TPPR HF R LXXHPN Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card with 100mm plinth natural ventilation TPPR HF R LRXHPN Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board with 100mm plinth natural ventilation TPPR HF R LXMHPN Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Modbus Interface Board with 100mm plinth natural ventilation TPPR HF R LRMHPN Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board Modbus Interface Board with 100mm plinth natural ventilation TPPR HF R LXXXPN Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card w o HON Logo with 100mm plinth natural ventilation TPPR HF R LRXXPN Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board with 100mm plinth w o HO
215. ominal DC 24V 20A should provide power for 15 mins with 12Ah batteries and 30 mins with 27Ah batteries Buffertime expired Output has switched off due to the setting on the buffertime limiter or buffering has stopped because of battery discharge protection This signal will be displayed for 15 minutes Buffertime Limiter Sets how long the UPS will supply power Usually set to infinity 00 which allows the system to run until power is restored or until the batteries discharge below working limits Replace batteries Buffer Voltage Sets the nominal output voltage For the TPPR this is set to DC 24V Charging The battery capacity is below 85 and the batteries are charging Inhibit active Indicates that buffering ability is disabled charging of batteries will continue or that a buffering event was aborted due to the inhibit function Input Voltage Input voltage is lower than the selected Buffer voltage 1 0V or higher than the input over voltage protection OVP level Overload Indicates if the output current is higher than specified values or if the unit has shut down during hiccup mode Ready The battery charge is above 85 no wiring failure is recognized input voltage is sufficient and inhibit signal is not active Indicates that the batteries have failed the battery health check and that both batteries should be replaced as soon as possible Caution Before carrying out any work ensure that th
216. on is mA mV performed Span Calibration 0 0 will be replaced with a number mV Sensitivity indicating the percentage sensitivity of the sensor compared to its first span STEL Alarm Y Y Y mA STEL Alarm Acknowledged mA STEL Alarm Cleared mA System Date Time changed System date and time not set System ID missing System ID updated System SRAM Failed There is a problem with the Touchpoint Pro internal memory System Time Zone changed Uncommissioned Module TBC Removed User 0 added 0 will be replace with the user name User 0 new password 0 will be replace with the user name User 0 removed 0 will be replace with the user name Warning Y Y mA mV Warning Acknowledged All Warning Cleared Web Login Logged when user logs in from Web Web Logout Logged when user logs out from Web Web SW Update Logged when web server software is updated Wiring Fault TBC Y mA 238 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 20 Appendix 7 Logged events and where they are displayed Displayed F Specific Event Comment Input Output Active Inputs Channel Type Details Details Events Outputs if applicable screen screen screen screen Wiring Fault Cleared mA Zero Calibration Logged when a zero calibration is mA mV performed 239 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions Notes 240 Find out more www honeywel
217. ons This section contains basic information about the various Touchpoint Pro major equipment and assemblies Note Power Supply Fluctuations are not to exceed 10 of nominal Note All equipment in this manual is rated to 2000 m 6562 ft altitude maximum 10 1 Rack Mounted Equipment All rack mounted enclosures are Equipment Class 1 grounded and Installation Category 2 A N WARNING This apparatus must be installed in a suitable enclosure which provides a Pollution Degree 2 environment in ordinary safe area locations AVERTISSEMENT Cet appareil doit tre install en zone sure dans un boitier conforme au niveau 2 de pollution environnementale Rack mounted equipment with or without a User Interface shall only be installed in ordinary safe area locations that provide a Pollution Degree 2 environment In addition the enclosure shall provide a level of protection of at least IP20 Type 1 Class 1 grounded to mitigate the risk of electrical shock Power Supply ratings and ambient operating conditions for rack mounted installations are dependent on the type and density of components that are installed Also the upper Ta may be reduced dependent on internal power dissipation See individual component Rating labels for further details 10 1 1 Touchpoint Pro User Interface only Part Number TPPR V 0852 Material Mild Steel w Membrane panel Earthing Points M8 main grounding other M6 Dimensions
218. onsibility to check individual rating plates before installation and to ensure that specifications are not exceeded during operation Exceeding the approved ratings invalidates product certification and the manufacturers warranties Honeywell Touchpoint Pro Pet Numbers Vin 24 Vdc 16 32 Vde Pma xw O Desalter Tamb 40 C to yy C SIREMOTE WALL MOUNT 22 Dw 2 Syste I0 Sena Number Tag Nember Be E Mod Sale BLi1213141516 718 9 10 O Do not open when a famrrable gas atmosphere is present De not open when energised Keep door locked Ne pas cuviir l cuipemen dans des aimosph res contenant des gaz infammables Ne pas ouvrir sous tension Laisser les portes verrouill es c Class Zone 2 Ex nA nC iC T IP IP66 TYPE 4 4X Pollution Degree 4 42 N Read and understand mantal before installation SL SIRA 15ATEX4034X O IECEX SIR15 0021x N3GEXnANCIIC T4 Ge Tamb See rating box Class Div 2 ABCD T4 Classi Zone ZAEx nA nC IIC T4 240005435 rev2 test Tamb See rating box operating or servicing Lire et comprendre le manuel Y avant d installer d utiliser ou de r parer l quipement mmm CIA C222 Me W7 Madein Honeywell Analytics Ltd Poole Dorset UK BH17 ORZ UK www honeywellanalylics com Manufacturer Part Number Description ID and Serial Number Modification State Safety Warning Ingress Ratings Manufacturer Details
219. onsider the module s to be unserviceable or beyond repair To remove a module 1 If not already logged in login with a valid administrator level user name 2 From the System Status screen select the Extras icon then System Configuration 3 Re enter the password and press Login 4 Select System Setup 5 The screen will show the system setup tree listing of all installed I O modules and Control Centre Board s 6 Select the required channel press the Menu icon and select Edit Configuration 7 Select Remove Module and confirm by selecting Yes 8 Press OK 9 If required select another screen to edit otherwise close the menu window 85 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 6 Commissioning 6 10 Commission Power Supply Unit Status Channels Note The PSU Status Inputs do not need to be used to monitor the power supplies if this function is not required They can also be configured to be used as Global Acknowledge Global Reset or Global Inhibit 1 If not already logged in login with a valid administrator level user name 2 From the System Status screen select the Extras icon then System Configuration 3 Re enter the password and press Login 4 Select System Setup 5 The screen will show the system setup tree listing of all installed I O modules PSU Status Inputs and Control Centre Board s 6 Select a Power Supply Unit Status channel press the Menu icon and select Commission Channel
220. or Cleared ROM Remote Input Active If DIM channel is active and DIM is VY VY DIM participating in Remote Interactions Remote Input Cleared DIM Reset Button Password Setting The Reset button on the Touchpoint Modified Pro front panel can optionally be password protected the setting has been changed Ring 0 Fault 0 will be replaced by A or B Y Ring 0 Fault Acknowledged 0 will be replaced by A or B Ring 0 Fault Acknowledged at O will be replaced by A or B Ring 0 Fault at CCB 0 will be replaced by A or B Y Ring 0 Fault at CCB 0 will be replaced by A or B Acknowledged Ring 0 Fault at CCB Cleared 0 will be replaced by A or B Ring 0 Fault between Controller 0 will be replaced by A or B 236 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 20 Appendix 7 Logged events and where they are displayed Displayed we F Specific Event Comment Input Output Active Inputs Channel Type Details Details Events Outputs if applicable screen screen screen screen Ring 0 Fault Cleared at 0 will be replaced by A or B Ring Communication Error If Module is in Fault all channels Y Y All of the Module will show Ring Communication Error Ring Communication Error All Cleared Ring Oscillation Fault TBC Ring Oscillation Fault Acknowledged Ring Oscillation Fault Cleared ROM Channel Modified ROM
221. or convenient system configuration e Accept and reset buttons on the front panel of the Touchpoint Pro Controller e Power Alarm Fault and Inhibit LEDs on the front panel of the Touchpoint Pro Controller e Buzzer on the Touchpoint Pro Controller Further Interfaces consist of e Two master relays System Failure and System Fault e Connections for SD Card and USB memory device e 10 100 Mbps Ethernet connection e Optional digital bus interface The interface software has two distinct modes of operation Configuration Mode and Visualisation Mode Within each mode access to certain functions is restricted by the use of password protected access levels There are four hierarchical access levels View is available to all users while Operator Maintenance Engineer and Administrator are password protected Each user can be assigned one access level Access to certain functions is also restricted via the Web Server for safety reasons 5 2 Access Levels The table below details the access levels for the User Interface The highest level of password protected access is Administrator then Maintenance Engineer then Operator Broadly speaking the Administrator can commission modules and configure channels the Maintenance Engineer can edit channel configuration and do calibration and the Operator can interact with the system during normal day to day operation such as acknowledging and resetting events The table also shows which functions are not
222. or the setting to take effect 10 Repeat for all un commissioned modules on the system 82 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 6 Commissioning Note After network initialisation the Input Output modules are shown according to their physical order on the Ring A network clockwise As soon as the module ID is assigned Input Output module is commissioned the Input Output modules will be sorted according to the assigned module ID M01 MO2 etc If there is a combination of commissioned and un commissioned Input Output modules on the network the commissioned modules are shown below the un commissioned modules Note The LEDs on the module will indicate flashing green when the module is un commissioned and solid green after commissioning Note It is good practice to command the Control Centre Board to remove modules before physically removing them even if you consider the module s to be unserviceable or beyond repair The Remove Module button is directly underneath the Commission Module button just touch the ID of the module you want to remove and then touch Remove Module Confirm the ID is correct and then touch Yes to carry out the action The removal is added to the event log and a red alarm icon is shown in the menu bar Note If the Ring Network does not initialise please refer to Chapter 9 Problem Solving 6 9 Channel Configuration Note Administrator level access is required to commis
223. otected from direct sunlight and rain Power Supply Fluctuations are not to exceed DC 18 32 V SELV Supply or 10 of nominal All versions of Enclosure apparatus are electrical Class 1 and must be connected to Protective Earth Ground The Touchpoint Pro installation must include a means of isolating or disconnecting the input voltage supply The isolation or disconnection device must be conveniently located close to the system and be clearly labelled For an AC mains voltage supply the isolation or disconnection device must disconnect both the line and neutral poles but maintain earth ground continuity The Touchpoint Pro input voltage supply must include over current protection All cabling must be appropriately rated and approved in accordance with local national and company regulations and suitable for the installation Additionally cabling must satisfy requirements defined in the manuals of connected field devices in particular if the field device is certified for use in a hazardous location All signal cables and interconnections must be shielded and the shields terminated only at the unified earth ground bus bar situated inside the enclosure All conduits and cable armour shall be bonded to protective earth ground To avoid ground loops isolating cable entry glands shall be used at the enclosure end where conduits or armour are earthed at the sensor end Cable entry glands blanking plugs reducers adaptors and
224. our licence you must use or supply the same e mail address that you used for the original licence Failing to do so will automatically bill you for a completely new licence 5 4 Local Interface Touchscreen The touchscreen is a resistive type which can be activated using a finger or a stylus All interactions are single tap Caution Do not use sharp objects as damage could be caused to the screen 5 5 Web Server The Web Server is an external interface that provides web clients with data from the Touchpoint Pro System This facility allows remote access to Touchpoint Pro to view live status and analyse event history It is also possible to acknowledge inhibit and reset I O channels Calibration and configuration are not available over the Web Server The Web Server supports 5 concurrent web clients however it does not restrict further users from connecting System performance may be degraded in this case Note The Web Server is compatible with Internet Explorer version 8 Please refer to Chapter 6 Commissioning for the necessary settings The following browsers are also supported 72 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 5 User Interface e Internet explorer 6 0 to 8 0 e Chrome up to V38 e Safari e Chrome up to V38 on Android devices 5 6 PC Configuration Software The optional PC Configuration Software is optimised for the larger screen of a PC instead of the local touchscreen The menu and n
225. placement By N A Configuration Backup N A Configuration Restore N A Delete Configuration rey N A Diagnostics Event History N A Meaning sad PC Config con Icon Extras N A Filter es N A Firmware Update N A Global Settings N A Go to Inputs N A Go to Outputs E N A Help i Home Gi Licence Cancel N A Licence Install N A Licence Manage N A Drop down Menu g oh BBE amp Modbus Settings T N A Panel Configuration g N A 227 MAN0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 19 Appendix 6 Glossary of Icons Moanin T screen PC Config g Icon Icon Password Change N A Regional settings N A Remove User Menu Item Reports N A Ring Network Screen Locked User Login Screen Unlocked BDE User Logout SD Card N A o Select Language ii DE Seoek Sensor Catalogue Update N A Service Contact Settings N A System Configuration r wy TaN gt N System Setup TCP IP Settings N A FS Trend Graph Settings X N A Meaning T screen PC Config Icon Icon User Management G Zoom in X axis A we Zoom in Y axis t N A Zoom out X axis N A Zoom out Y axis F f N A 228 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 19 2 Icons for System Setup Tree Configuration Mode Touchpoint Pro Opera
226. point Pro Operating Instructions 8 Maintenance 8 1 3 Configuration Settings Test Note Engineer access level is required During this test all field device inputs will be ignored by the Touchpoint Pro system The Cause and Effect matrix will not be evaluated No outputs will be generated The purpose of this test is to check that input channels are configured correctly including alarm warning fault thresholds etc The gas concentration and alarm states raised for the channel as a consequence of forcing the input to a given value can be viewed on the touchscreen or the Web Server To use the Configuration Settings Test mode 1 If not already logged in login with a valid engineer level user name 2 From the System Status screen select the Extras icon then Diagnostics Press the Menu icon w and select Configuration Settings Test The system will ask you to confirm press Yes to proceed The system will display a confirmation message click on OK and you will be automatically navigated to the Inputs screen 6 Select the channel to be tested and select Input Details from the popup menu From the Input Details screen press the Menu icon w and select Force Value Enter the gas concentration that you want to simulate This can include over and under range values The system will return to the Input Details screen where it will show the simulated gas value as well as any corresponding active events e g Alarm 1 10 When ready press th
227. ps Ethernet connection e Optional digital bus interface 23 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 2 Overview Introduction Actuators Sensors Laptop Configuration a b PC Configuration Software Saas Gateway a O0000000 Touchpoint Pr pest ie Configuration and Visualisation Touchscreen LEDs Sounder Buttons Removable Memory C A sa ja ae Visualisation Web Server SS A Master Relays Fig 2 5 Touchpoint Pro Interfaces 2 8 Sensor Catalogue For convenient sensor configuration the Touchpoint Pro Controller is loaded with a sensor catalogue which contains a complete listing of all Honeywell Analytics gas sensors each with a full default configuration setting A user can choose to configure input channel settings from the sensor catalogue resulting in a three step configuration process select channel ID program channel tags and select sensor and gas The rest of the configuration will be loaded automatically The full configuration can be viewed afterwards and individual parameters changed if desired 24 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 2 Overview Introduction 2 9 Power Supply Options 2 9 1 Touchpoint Pro Power Supplies The Touchpoint Pro System can be equipped with power supplies of different capacity The power supplies are mounted to the DIN Rail and are a
228. ption is available This unit is IP 66 Type 4 amp 4X Class 1 grounded and can be installed indoors or outdoors in a Pollution Degree 4 environment and can be exposed to rain snow and direct sunlight The upper T may be reduced dependent on internal power dissipation See Rating Plate for details Part Number TPPR V 1241 Material Stainless Steel Dimensions H x W x D 780 x 510 x 300 mm Weight 42 Kg Basic Unit Operating Conditions 40 to 65 C T 0 100 RH condensing Power Supplies 24 VDC Nominal 18 32 VDC 0 20 A max Pmax See Rating Plate 10 3 Floor Standing Enclosures A WARNING Protect from direct exposure to precipitation and sunlight AVERTISSEMENT Prot ger des expositions directes au soleil et de la pluie Ventilated enclosures are IP20 Type 1 Class 1 grounded installation category 2 and must only be installed in a place that provides a Pollution Degree 2 environment l e places that afford protection from rain snow and direct sunlight Such an environment would include laboratories offices and Control rooms Non ventilated sealed enclosures are IP56 Type 4 amp 12 Class 1 grounded installation category 2 and can be installed indoors or outdoors in a Pollution Degree 3 environment that affords total protection from rain snow and direct sunlight The upper T may be reduced dependent on internal power dissipation See Rating Plates for detail
229. puts icon is visible the Outputs icon is visible from the Inputs screen and vice versa 1 From the System Status screen navigation bar select the Inputs icon 2 A list of all input channels is shown in order of channel ID The channel ID location tag gas name status and current reading are shown The list can be filtered by status Alarm Fault Inhibit Warning or All Select a channel Depending on access level a number of options are shown Function Access Level Comment Inhibit Engineer Inhibits the channel On an inhibited channel this option is Clear Inhibit See Normal Operation Inhibit for more information Calibration Engineer Option to calibrate the channel See Commissioning Calibration for more information Trend Graph View Shows the trend graph for the channel See Normal Operation View Trend Graph for more information Input Details View Shows detailed information about the channel including Custom ID sensor and gas name gas reading configured alarms and alarm levels View Signal Administrator Shows the raw signal being received on the channel 104 Touchpoint Pro MAN0923_Issue 3_04 15 Operating Instructions 7 Normal Operation P _ gt All 4 P f Select Function x 1D Location p daas i01 ioa Inhibit Input Details Trend Graph Gas Calibration 101 Detailansicht Channel i01 Figure 7 14 Input Details Screen 7 8 Vie
230. r Name Default Setting Value Range Alarm 1 Enable Enabled Enabled Disabled Alarm 1 Level 20 FSD According to sensor range Alarm 1 Trigger Rising Rising Falling Alarm 1 Latch Latching Non Latching Latching 15 2 8 Threshold Alarm 2 Settings Access Level Engineer Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range Alarm 2 Enable Enabled Enabled Disabled Alarm 2 Level 50 FSD According to sensor range Alarm 2 Trigger Rising Rising Falling Alarm 2 Latch Latching Non Latching Latching 15 2 9 Threshold Alarm 3 Settings Access Level Engineer Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range Alarm 3 Enable Enabled Enabled Disabled Alarm3 Level 75 FSD According to sensor range Alarm3 Trigger Rising Rising Falling Alarm3 Latch Latching Non Latching Latching 203 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 15 Appendix 2 Configurable Parameter Reference Guide 15 2 10 Threshold Alarm Hysteresis Access Level Engineer Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range Comment Threshold Alarm Hysteresis 2 FSD 0 0 to 10 0 FSD The hysteresis value will be applied to a channel coming out of an alarm condition e g if the alarm level is 20 FSD and hysteresis is set to 2 the alarm will not be cancelled until the reading has dropped below 18 FSD 15 2 11 Rate Alarm Settings 1 Note
231. r Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Modbus Interface Board forced ventilation TPPR HF R LRMHXF Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board Modbus Interface Board forced ventilation TPPR HF R LXXXXF Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card w o HON Logo forced ventilation TPPR HF R LRXXXF Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board w o HON Logo forced ventilation TPPR HF R LXMXXF Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Modbus Interface Board w o HON Logo forced ventilation TPPR HF R LRMXXF Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card on Forced ventilation without plinth without power distribution w o HON Logo forced ventilation w o power distribution 173 TPPR HF RS LXXHXF Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card forced ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF RS LRXHXF Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre B
232. r TPPR V 1997 Door Inlet Fan and Replaceable Filter 24V DC Filter Fan TPPR V 1999 43 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 4 Electrical Installation WARNING Installation must be in accordance with the recognized standards of the appropriate authority in the country concerned Refer to local national and company regulations 4 1 Power Consumption The power consumption of your system was calculated when it was ordered Please refer to the Certificate of Conformity supplied or the rating plate for the power consumption 4 2 Power Supply WARNING All power supplies must be hard wired and must include a circuit breaker RCD RCCB and close by and unobstructed a means of manually isolating and locking out the power supply without breaking the true earth ground connection Removable plug and socket connection is not permitted under any circumstance 4 2 1 AC Power Input AC Power input if used must be single phase 100 240 Vac 50 60 Hz The mains supply requires an overcurrent protection rated in accordance with the rating plate on the specific system The supply must be a fixed installation i e not plug and socket The supply must be able to be isolated by means of a switch or circuit breaker which must be suitably located easily reached and clearly marked as the Touchpoint Pro disconnect device The wiring used between the isolator and Touchpoint Pro must be
233. r by forcing the mA output of the sensor to a given value The gas concentration and alarm states raised for the channel can be viewed on the touchscreen or the Web Server To use the Field Inputs Test mode 1 If not already logged in login with a valid engineer level user name 2 From the System Status screen select the Extras icon then Diagnostics a Press the Menu icon and select Field Inputs Test The system will ask you to confirm press Yes to proceed The system will display a confirmation message click on OK and you will be automatically navigated to the Active Events screen 6 Proceed with the test of the field devices To see more detailed information at any time select the channel of interest and select Input Details from the popup menu Note If the test is done from the Active Events screen the channel of interest will be shown as soon as its state changes e g a threshold alarm is generated Alternatively you may wish to work from the Inputs screen return to System Status screen and select Inputs by scrolling down to the channel of interest 7 When the test is complete return to the System Status screen and select the Extras icon then Diagnostics Press the Menu icon wd and select Stop Field Inputs Test The system will show a confirmation message that it has returned to normal operation WARNING Ensure that the system is returned to normal operation once testing is complete 111 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touch
234. r distribution TPPR HF RS LXMXXX Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Modbus Interface Board W o HON Logo w o ventilation w o power distributio n PR HF RS LRMXXX F R d oor Standing Cabin istribution et edundant Control Centre Board Modbus Interface Board w o HON Logo w o ventilation w o power with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D i cludes Control er wi h HMI PCBs SD Card Without ventilation with plinth PPR HF R LXXHPX Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card with 100mm plinth w o ventilation TPPR HF R LRXHPX Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board with 100mm plinth w o ventilation TPPR HF R LXMHPX Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Modbus Interface Board with 100mm plinth w o ventilation TPPR HF R LRMHPX Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board Modbus Interface Board with 100mm plinth w o ventilation 170 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 12 Ordering Information Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions
235. r message Windows limitation Browser does not fully shut down on exit or other instances remain open on exit CTRL ALT DEL gt Start Task Manager gt Processes gt Chrome exe gt End Process or your browser exe of choice Close Task Manager and relaunch your browser not functioning as expected Configuration Unexpected timeout When you enter To avoid this timeout send a value to the Touchpoint Pro system during configuration the System within the 20 minute period Setup menu If the timeout has occurred it may be necessary to set the module a 20 minute back to Normal state Navigate to the System Setup screen select configuration the module and from the popup menu select Normal state timeout is active If this was a first time configuration all data will have been deleted separate to the and the channel decommissioned If you were editing a channel user login timeout any data not sent to the Touchpoint Pro system will be lost Inhibit Mode Cannot clear Inhibit It is possible Ensure all Inhibits are cleared from a Channel to have more than one inhibit condition active on a channel and you have to resolve all inhibit conditions before the inhibit can be cleared 1 0 channels Channel alarm is Some parameters Check the definitions of parameters in Commissioning Channel may be defined in a different way Configuration and verify settings accordingly 129 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro
236. rements for Ordinary Locations and where marked on components and apparatus Zone 2 and Division 2 Hazardous Locations Products components and apparatus bearing the ATEX Explosion Protection mark conform to the requirements for Zone 2 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres WARNING us FOR SAFETY REASONS THIS EQUIPMENT MUST BE OPERATED BY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL ONLY READ AND UNDERSTAND THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL COMPLETELY BEFORE OPERATING OR SERVICING THE EQUIPMENT ATTENTION POUR DES RAISONS DE SECURITE CET EQUIPEMENT DOIT ETRE UTILISE ENTRETENU ET REPARE UNIQUEMENT PAR UN PERSONNEL QUALIFIE ETUDIER LE MANUEL D INSTRUCTIONS EN ENTIER AVANT D UTILISER D ENTRETENIR OU DE R PARER L EQUIPEMENT MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 1 Safety and Information WARNINGS The equipment specified in this manual is only to be installed by the Manufacturer s trained personnel or by competent persons trained in accordance with the Manufacturer s installation instructions Installation must be in accordance with the recognized standards of the appropriate authority in the country concerned Refer to local national and company regulations Do not operate the Touchpoint Pro system or its components outside of their rated operating specification Touchpoint Pro must not be operated in Oxygen enriched atmospheres i e greater than 25 v v Oxygen All equipment containing a User Interface must be suitably pr
237. rent rating for the module is 8 A An overcurrent protection device should be fitted to prevent higher current flowing through the relay contacts 62 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 The auxiliary voltage supply can provide 18 32 Vdc 24 Vdc nominal to the field devices at a maximum current of 1 5 A per channel with the additional limitation that the total current drawn from the module must not exceed 1 5 A The supply is short circuit protected if a short circuit is detected the supply to all four channels will be disconnected to prevent damage to the module If the cause of the short circuit is removed the auxiliary voltage supply will be restored automatically 4 Electrical Installation Terminal Identification Label Channel 1 NO Relay 1 2 NC 3 C 4 NO Relay 2 5 NC 6 C 7 NO Relay 3 8 NC 9 C 10 NO Relay 4 11 NC 12 C 13 V Aux 1 14 V 15 V 16 V Aux 2 17 V 18 V 19 V Aux 3 20 V 21 V 22 V Aux 4 23 V 24 V Note Relay contacts are shown in the shelf state not powered 63 Operating Instructions MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 4 Electrical Installation Touchpoint Pro Figure 4 19 ROM connection 4 8 8 Ring Coupling Module Terminal Identification Label Channel 1 Ring A In 2 Drain 3 4 Ring B Out 5 Drain 6 7 Ring B in 8 Drain
238. resentative 59 Operation failed a session has Another user may be 1 Check if another user is logged in already been opened by another logged in via one of the 2 If your requirement takes priority you have the user alternative interfaces option to terminate the existing other user s session local touchscreen or PC Configuration Software 60 The session has expired new user A user login will time The system will automatically request a new login login required out after 20 minutes of inactivity 61 Not used 62 Not used 63 Operation failed CRC error occurred Please refer to error 2 Please refer to error 2 for safe data 64 Operation failed CRC error occurred Please refer to error 2 Please refer to error 2 for non safe data 65 Operation failed session does not User login is required The system will automatically request a new login exist user login required before carrying out the intended operation 66 Operation failed CCB did not Please refer to error 2 Please refer to error 2 respond within the expected time interval 67 Configuration read write request During configuration the 1 Retry the operation failed FLASH memory operation CCB was unable to read 2 If the error has not cleared if possible cycle the timeout or write a value from to power to the system non volatile memory 3 If the problem persists please contact your local service representative 68 The Network Initialisation failed the The system wil
239. rm and select Reset from the popup menu This will reset only the selected alarm Note The Reset button on the front panel of the Touchpoint Pro must be pressed for gt 0 5 s to take effect 7 5 Faults and Warnings 7 5 1 View Faults and Warnings Detailed information about active Faults and Warnings can be viewed in two ways 1 From the System Status screen select either the Fault yellow triangle icon or the Warning grey triangle icon The screen will show a filtered list of only the active Faults or Warnings 2 Select the Active Events icon to show all active events then the Filter icon and select Fault or Warning from the popup menu a z 4 cii Toputs Select Filter 1D location f Gas aS ivaue Figure 7 11 Active Events Screen with filter options 7 5 2 Acknowledge an active Fault or Warning Note The system can be configured so that the Accept button is password protected and requires a user to login minimum Operator access level via the touchscreen See Commissioning Control Centre Board Configuration Note Accept and Acknowledge have the same meaning in this context 102 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 7 Normal Operation An active fault or warning can be acknowledged in three ways 1 Press the Accept button on the front panel of the Touchpoint Pro This will acknowledge ALL active events 2 From the Inputs or Outputs screen select the individual channel and select Ackno
240. ro suppression Negative values Note Trend logging takes place when the value of an input channel changes The system will not log values while they remain within the zero suppression limits Note If a threshold alarm level is set within the zero suppression band no alarm signal will be generated 15 1 7 Threshold Alarm 1 Settings Access Level Engineer Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range Alarm 1 Enable Enabled Enabled Disabled Alarm 1 Level 20 FSD According to sensor range Alarm 1 Trigger Rising Rising Falling Alarm 1 Latch Latching Non Latching Latching 15 1 8 Threshold Alarm 2 Settings Access Level Engineer Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range Alarm 2 Enable Enabled Enabled Disabled Alarm 2 Level 50 FSD According to sensor range Alarm 2 Trigger Rising Rising Falling Alarm 2 Latch Latching Non Latching Latching 15 1 9 Threshold Alarm 3 Settings Access Level Engineer Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range Alarm 3 Enable Enabled Enabled Disabled Alarm3 Level 75 FSD According to sensor range Alarm3 Trigger Rising Rising Falling Alarm3 Latch Latching Non Latching Latching 194 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 15 Appendix 2 Configurable Parameter Reference Guide 15 1 10 Threshold Alarm Hysteresis Access Level Engineer Parameter Name
241. s 147 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 10 Specifications 10 3 1 Floor Standing Cabinets Front Access Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions Part Number TPPR V 1250 TPPR V 1252 TPPR V 1254 Material No Ventilation Natural Ventilation Forced Ventilation Dimensions H x W x D 2075 x 800 x 694 mm Weight 230 Kg Operating Conditions Ventilated 20 to 55 C T 10 90 RH non condensing Non Ventilated 20 to 55 C T O 100 RH condensing Power Supplies 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 0 25 A max 24 VDC Nominal 18 32 VDC 0 100 A max Pmax See Rating Plate 10 3 2 Floor Standing Cabinets Rear Access Part Number TPPR V 1260 TPPR V 1262 TPPR V 1264 Material No Ventilation Natural Ventilation Forced Ventilation Dimensions H x W x D 2075 x 800 x 694 mm Weight 230 Kg Operating Conditions Ventilated 20 to 55 C T 10 90 RH non condensing Non Ventilated 20 to 55 C T O 100 RH condensing Power Supplies 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 0 25 A max 24 VDC Nominal 18 32 VDC 0 100 A max Pmax See Rating Plate 10 4 Power Supplies and Fuses 10 4 1 Power Supply Units OEM Specifications Type Model QS5 241 QS10 241 QS20 241 Power Supply 120 W 5 A 240 W 10 A 480 W 20 A Input Voltage Range 85 276 VAC 88 187 VDC Inpu
242. s and if required Setup Web Server If the PC Configuration Software is being used complete First Time Switch On and Set Date Time and Language then Setup PC Configuration Software using the touchscreen then continue through the procedures using the PC Configuration Software If the system was ordered from Honeywell Analytics with default channel configurations complete the section Verify Configuration and Program Tags for the Analogue Input channels before proceeding with Channel Configuration for the Digital Input and Relay Output channels First Time Switch On Checks that are required on first power up Set Date Time and Language How to set the real time clock and the display language Program Users and Passwords How to set up users and access levels Setup Web Server How to connect to the web server interface Setup PC Configuration Software How to connect to Touchpoint Pro using the PC Configuration Software Verify Default Configuration and Program Tags For systems ordered with a default configuration how to check the configuration and set site specific tags Module Configuration How to configure input output modules Channel Configuration How to configure individual input output channels and program the cause and effect matrix 6 2 First Time Switch On 1 Before applying power to the unit ensure that the wiring to the unit is correct and all electrical connections are in accordance with Section
243. s active The inhibit condition will clear after the Delay Time has expired 5 If there is no Delay Time active then investigate the conditions at the sensor transmitter 71 Cannot reset because the 0 is still The field device is still Investigate the conditions at the field device active where 0 is alarm fault or signalling an active warning alarm fault or warning 72 Cannot reset all events for this Some alarms faults or Investigate the conditions at the field device channel because one or more events warnings on the channel are still active have been reset but others are still active 73 Replace operation cannot be Replacement module 1 Check and confirm that the replacement module is performed module type of new is incorrect type or not of the correct type module is not compatible recognised by the CCB 2 Re initialise the ring network and try again 3 If the error persists update the CCB firmware 4 If the problem persists please contact your local service representative 74 Not used 75 Not used 76 Not used 77 Not used 78 Not used 79 The Input Module cannot be Touchpoint Pro has a If more channels than 64 inputs and 128 outputs commissioned The maximum maximum capacity of are required an additional Touchpoint Pro system is number of 16 Input Modules has 16 Input and 32 Output needed Contact your local representative to discuss already been commissioned on the Modules your requirements system 80 The Output Mo
244. s data from all channels of the Touchpoint Pro Control System Full details of the Modbus protocol can be found in the latest revision of the Modicon Modbus Protocol Reference Guide PI MBUS 300 available at www modbus org Note Some transceiver manufacturers incorrectly use RS 485 pin A as data positive and pin B as data negative You may have to swap over TDA and TDB A in and B in if your Modbus does not work as expected The addressing conventions and register values used follow those set by Modicon The first digit of the on board memory address refers to the data type stored in the register and therefore defines the Modbus function command that should be used when polling it 1xxxx The Input Status Register addresses record the individual channels status They are read using Modbus Function 02 3xxxx The Input Register addresses record the current input values of the individual channels They are read using Modbus Function 04 4xxxx The Holding Register addresses have two purposes One range of addresses is used to send commands and receive the results of those commands The other address range is used to send queries and store the results of those queries They can be written singly using Modbus Function 06 written as a block using Modbus Function 16 and read using Modbus Function 03 177 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 14 Appendix 1 Modbus Option 14 2 Installation 14 2 1 Inst
245. se retry the operation length Please retry the operation If has an internal 2 If still unsuccessful on the front panel press the the problem persists please contact communication issue Accept and Reset buttons together for 10 s which your local service representative will restart the COB 3 If the error has not cleared if possible cycle the power to the system 4 If the problem persists please contact your local service representative 3 Operation failed invalid source A software or firmware 1 Refer to the Help screen to confirm the currently address Please verify that the update is not compatible installed version of software and firmware current COB software and CCB with other installed 2 Refer to the Touchpoint Pro users support website firmware revisions are compatible components to verify that the current COB software and CCB firmware revisions are compatible 3 If required update the appropriate software firmware see Maintenance 132 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 9 Problem Solving Error Message Possible Cause Remedial Action Code 4 1 0 Module parameter write failed The CCB may not 1 Please initialise the ring network and try again UDID does not match recognise the module 2 If the error persists update the CCB firmware type see Maintenance 5 Not used 6 Operation failed invalid channel type Please
246. shield screen should be connected to Earth tag bar bus bar provided in Touchpoint Pro enclosure 2 Switch can be manually operated push button or potential free contact 3 Components marked with in field for individual channels R 10KQ 0 25W 1 3 Maximum current through closed contact limited to 15mA 216 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 16 Appendix 3 Wiring Diagrams 16 7 DIM in Supervised Configuration Recommended Cable 2 Core Twisted Mesh Type Shielded 1 5mm or 2 5mm DIM Module Ryy 2 7KQ Switch Rat 10K Channel 1 1 075 KQ OVDC 24VDC Switch Channel 2 1 075 KQ OVDC 24VDC Ry 2 7KQ Switch Channel 3 1 075 KQ OVDC 24VDC Switch Channel 4 1 075 KQ OVDC Notes 1 For all shielded cables shield screen should be connected to Earth tag bar bus bar provided in Touchpoint Pro enclosure 2 Switch can be manually operated push button or potential free contact 3 Components marked with in field for individual channels R 10KQ 0 25W 1 Ry 2 7KQ 0 25W 1 3 Maximum current through closed contact limited to 15mA 217 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 16 Appendix 3 Wiring Diagrams 16 8 AIM mV with Sensor connectivity Recommended Cable 3 Core Twisted Mesh Type Shielded 1 5mm or 2 5mm AIM mV Module Catalytic Sensor 1 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3
247. sion a channel but Engineer level access can be used to edit many of the parameters Please refer to User Interface Access Levels for details 6 9 1 Introduction Individual channels can be configured in several ways either from the built in sensor catalogue for Analogue Input modules only by completing a full custom configuration or by copying a previously configured channel When the sensor catalogue or the copy function is used only the Channel ID and the tags must be programmed The rest of the configuration is populated automatically Note If a channel is configured from the sensor catalogue or copied from another channel it is possible to edit individual settings afterwards see section Editing a Configured Channel The configuration software populates the parameters with appropriate default values To change any parameter enter the new value and press Send to send it to the system The system will then return the value which will be displayed on the screen and the user must press Accept for the setting to take effect This is to allow the user to verify that the correct value has reached the system New values can be entered in various ways e Free text e g location tag e Numeric keypad e Check uncheck a box e g to toggle an alarm between latching and non latching e Select an option by checking a radio button e Select from a list of available options e g channel number The configuration is designed to b
248. ssue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 3 Mechanical Installation 10 Drill out the hole required for the cable entry Caution Support the cable gland plate to avoid distortion 11 Fit and lock cable glands to the cable entries The cable glands should be appropriate to the application and capable of maintaining the IP20 rating The cable glands must provide anchorage and stress relief for the incoming cables 12 Re fit the cable gland plate 13 Feed the cable through the glands 14 Terminate the cable in accordance with Chapter 4 Electrical Installation 15 On completion of installation close and lock the enclosure door WARNING Unauthorised modification of the Touchpoint Pro system or components is not allowed as this will invalidate the legal certifications and may render the system dangerous or inoperable 3 8 Cooling and Ventilation The following items may be supplied with your purchase They are an integral part of the cooling and ventilation system and they contribute to the IP rating and should therefore not be removed Attempting to remove them may cause irreparable damage to the housings or components These items should be checked for cleanliness dust and function as part of your normal maintenance cycle Faulty items must be replaced with an exact match item to maintain system integrity Description Part Number Roof Exhaust Unit TPPR V 1996 Door Inlet Vent and Replaceable Filte
249. sue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 6 Commissioning If not already logged in login with a valid engineer level user name From the System Status screen select the Inputs icon El then select the channel to be calibrated Select Calibration from the popup menu Select Zero Adjust and when ready press OK and apply clean air to the sensor View the gas reading until it is stable and then press Accept Confirm that the gas reading is zero and press Save then OK Select First Span DOG oO Ol Bo Enter the concentration of the span gas and press Accept 9 When ready press OK and apply gas to the sensor 10 View the gas reading until it is stable and then press Accept 11 Confirm that the gas reading is correct and press Save then OK 12 Remove the span gas from the sensor and confirm that the gas reading has returned to zero 13 Select Clear Inhibit to remove the inhibit from the channel 6 17 Calibrate mA input channel loops WARNING Where the sensor transmitter has the facility the mA loop should always be calibrated at the Touchpoint Pro controller by forcing signal levels at the sensor transmitter Any gas calibration required must be carried out at the field device according to the manufacturer s instructions The Touchpoint Pro controller calibration should not be used to adjust for deficiencies in the sensor transmitter gas calibration Failure to observe this can result in significant accur
250. t Output Active Inputs Channel Type Details Details Events Outputs if applicable screen screen screen screen 49th Module present System has detected that too many Y 1 0 modules are connected 49th Module removed Accept Button Password Setting The Accept button on the Touchpoint Modified Pro front panel can optionally be password protected the setting has been changed Active Fault VY Active Fault Cleared Active Warning A Active Warning Cleared ADC Error Raised for hardware error in lO A DIM Module channel diagnostics ADC Error Cleared DIM AIM Fault Acknowledged AIM mA Channel Modified AIM mV Channel Modified AIM Warning Acknowledged Alarm Y 4 Y Alarm 1 A A A mA mV Alarm 1 Acknowledged mA mV Alarm 1 Cleared mA mV Alarm 2 Y Y Y mA mV Alarm 2 Acknowledged mA mV Alarm 2 Cleared mA mV Alarm 3 Y Y Y mA mV 230 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 20 Appendix 7 Logged events and where they are displayed Displayed ee F Specific Event Comment Input Output Active Inputs Channel Type Details Details Events Outputs if applicable screen screen screen screen Alarm 3 Acknowledged mA mV Alarm 3 Cleared mA mV Alarm acknowledged Alarm cleared Auxiliary output overload Occurs when a short circuit is Y Y ROM detected on one of the ROM
251. t quipement a fait objet de tests de performance m trologique suivant la directive ATEX WARNING CSA performance is only valid when connected to Honeywell Model 705 Catalytic Gas Detectors or suitably approved 4 20 mA Gas Detectors AVERTISSEMENT La performance en conformit avec la CSA est valide uniquement lorsque l appareil est connect aux d tecteurs de gaz catalytiques Honeywell mod le 705 ou a des d tecteurs de gaz 4 20 mA d ment approuv s 11 2 Applicable National and International Standards The Touchpoint Pro systems described in this manual are declared to conform to the following National and International Standards when installed and operated in accordance with the Manufacturer s specifications and stipulations Ordinary Location Standards Zone 2 Div 2 Hazardous Location Standards CAN USA C22 2 No 61010 1 CSA 22 2 No 152 UL Std No 61010 1 EN IEC 61010 1 FM 6310 amp 6320 ANSI ISA 12 12 01 CAN CSA C22 2 No 60079 0 CAN CSA C22 2 No 60079 15 CSA C22 2 No 0 M CSA C22 2 No 213 M EN IEC 60079 0 EN IEC 60079 15 UL 60079 0 UL 60079 15 FM 6310 amp 6320 155 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 11 Certification 11 3 National and International Certificates The Touchpoint Pro Zone 2 Div 2 Systems and System Components hold the following National and International Certificates and Certification Codes Descriptio
252. t LTEL Alarm Settings 15 1 13 Rate Alarm Settings 1 15 1 14 Rate Alarm Settings 2 15 1 15 Inhibit Delay Settings 15 1 16 Signal Range Fault Settings 15 1 17 Gas Range Fault Settings 15 1 18 Calibration Reminder Settings 15 1 19 Calibration Signal Settings 15 1 20 Calibration Span Gas Settings 15 1 21 Inhibit Signalling Settings 15 1 22 Fault Signalling Settings 1 15 1 23 Fault Signalling Settings 2 15 1 24 Custom Fault X Detail Settings Analogue Input Module mV Bridge 15 2 1 Commission Channel 15 2 2 Field Device Selection 15 2 3 Sensor Settings 15 2 4 Range Settings Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 177 178 178 179 180 180 180 184 185 186 187 187 187 187 188 188 189 190 190 191 192 192 192 192 193 193 193 194 194 194 194 195 195 195 196 196 197 197 198 198 199 199 199 200 200 200 201 201 201 202 202 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 17 18 20 Contents 15 2 5 Display Settings 15 2 6 Suppression Settings 15 2 7 Threshold Alarm 1 Settings 15 2 8 Threshold Alarm 2 Settings 15 2 9 Threshold Alarm 3 Settings 15 2 10 Threshold Alarm Hysteresis 15 2 11 Rate Alarm Settings 1 15 2 12 Rate Alarm Settings 2 15 2 13 Inhibit Delay Settings 15 2 14 Signal Range Fault Settings 15 2 15 Gas Range Fault Settings 15 2 16 Calibration Reminder Settings 15 2 17 Calibration Signal Settings 15 2 18 Calibration Span Gas Settings 15 3 Digital Input Module 15 3 1 Commission Channel 15
253. t gt Custom level gt Downloads Click on the Enable button under Automatic prompting for file downloads and under File download Select OK to return to Internet Options From Tools gt Internet Options select Advanced gt Browsing Check the box beside Display a notification about every script error Check the box beside Notify when downloads complete Oe PN Od Slee Be SON Select Apply to confirm the settings 9 From Tools gt Internet Options select General gt Browsing History gt Settings 10 Under Check for newer versions of stored pages click on the Automatically button 11 Select OK to return to Internet Options 12 Select Apply to confirm the settings and OK to close the window 6 5 3 Windows Settings Touchpoint Pro generates reports which can be viewed in Microsoft Excel To ensure reports are generated and opened correctly please check the file opening settings in Windows on the PC that is being used Windows 7 Windows 7 users will only encounter an issue if the Always ask before opening this type of file box has previously been unchecked In this case there will be no option to Open or Save the file that is being downloaded instead the previous choice will be done automatically The option to Confirm open after download can only be re enabled by editing the Windows registry It is recommended to consult your company s IT Support for
254. t Frequency Range 50 60 Hz 6 Input AC current 1 10 A at 120 VAC 2 22 A at 120 VAC 4 56 A at 120 VAC 0 62 A at 230 VAC 1 22 A at 230 VAC 2 48 A at 230 VAC Output Voltage DC 24 V Adjustable 24 28 VDC DC OK Relay contact 60 VDC 0 3 A 30 VDC 1 A 30 VAC 0 5 A resistive load ratings max Protection Short Circuit Overload current limiting No load Over Voltage Over Temperature Dimension 40 mm x 124 mm x 117 mm 60 mm x 124 mm x 117 mm 82 mm x 124 mm x 117 mm WxHxD WxHxD WxHxD Operating Temperature 25 C to 70 C 13 F to 158 F De rating 60 C to 70 C 3W C 6W C 12W C Storage Conditions 40 to 85 C 40 F to 185 F 5 to 95 RH non condensing Operating Humidity 5 to 95 RH non condensing 148 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 10 Specifications 10 4 2 DIN Rail Module Supply and Communication Description 5 7 9 or 10 way Communication Power Rail consists of 1 DIN Rail 1 Ring Coupling Module RCM and a 5 7 9 or 10 way Backplane Total Width 430 mm Type TS 35 15 Power Rating 18 32 VDC Supplied from Self Enclosed Low Voltage source only 10 4 3 Ring Coupling Module RCM Description Module for connection of DIN Rail mounted 1 0 modules to Ring Network Electrical Connection 2 x Ring Network TX RX Driver Pairs Each two wire plus Drain Supply Voltage 18 32 VDC Pow
255. t least 26 Vdc to ensure sufficient charging of the battery Note If the Power Redundancy Module is being used ensure that both power supplies are set to the same output voltage 4 3 Cabling Requirements WARNING All cabling must be appropriately rated and approved in accordance with local national and company regulations Additionally cabling must satisfy requirements defined in the manuals of connected field devices in particular if the field device is certified for use in a hazardous location All cabling should meet local national and site regulations and be suitable for the operating environment Cable should be appropriately rated and approved Bootlace ferrules must be used on all terminations For installation in Canada and the USA for both ordinary and hazardous locations all connections cabling overcurrent protection and installations must strictly adhere to both the National Electrical Code NEC and the Canadian Electrical Code CEC 45 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 4 Electrical Installation 4 3 1 Ring Network The external ring network cabling should be shielded twisted pair cable The terminals will accept a maximum wire size of 1 5 mm 4 3 2 Field devices Field device cabling should be appropriate to the area classification and in accordance with the device manufacturer s recommendations Refer to local and national regulations where appropriate and the field dev
256. tched output channels Remote Inhibit Enable Disabled Enabled Disabled The digital input can be used to inhibit input or output channels Remote Acknowledge Enable Disabled Enabled Disabled The digital input can be used to acknowledge alarm conditions If none of the remote interaction settings are enabled the digital input is treated as a Threshold Alarm 1 in the Cause and Effect matrix 15 3 5 Remote Group Interaction Settings Access Level Engineer If any of the remote interaction options are enabled above select Add View Group Member to choose the channels to associate with the Reset Inhibit or Acknowledge action Channels can be assigned to more than one interaction group A DIM channel assigned to carry out a remote interaction is not available to take part in any other interaction group WARNING Remote reset should not be used for catalytic sensors since gas could still be present even though the sensor reading has dropped Conditions at the field device should always be investigated before resetting an alarm 208 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 15 Appendix 2 Configurable Parameter Reference Guide 15 4 Relay Output Module The Relay Output Module has the option to configure a custom channel or copy from a configured channel Note If a channel is configured by copying from another channel it is possible to edit individual settings afterwards see Section
257. tem Fault relay e Any failure of the safety function e g due to major fault or power loss will activate the System Failure relay WARNING High off scale readings may indicate an explosive concentration AVERTISSEMENT Des r sultats d passant consid rablement I chelle peuvent tre indicateurs d une concentration explosive 7 2 Overview Touchscreen Interface 7 2 1 System Status screen The System Status screen provides a summary of the status of the Touchpoint Pro system as follows e Green tick system OK all input and output channels are in a Normal state e Red bell one or more input channels is in Alarm e Yellow triangle one or more channels is in Fault e Orange triangle one or more channels is in Inhibit e Grey triangle one or more channels is in Warning 92 MAN0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 7 Normal Operation H Pe y i Systemstatus Figure 7 1 System Status Screen H i l E a li System Status Figure 7 2 System Status Screen with Active Events 93 MAN0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 7 Normal Operation 7 2 2 Navigation Inputs and Outputs Screens The icons in the navigation bar are used to navigate through the User Interface Software A P J x Outputs rs Y F u a iai WI Tepul Deisis Chessel 01 i F elect Funernn x i System Status screen KEY Ey Inputs mii Figure
258. ters are written to the Touchpoint Pro system including during calibration The configuration version can be used as a check against unauthorised modification of the system Select About to view software and firmware versions Select Service Contact for details of how to access technical support 7 15 System State Relays The Control Module has two System State relays rated at 30 Vdc 3 A or 250 Vac 3 A which activate under the following conditions e The System Fault relay activates if there is any active fault or inhibit in the system e The System Failure relay activates if the safety function of the system is not operating for example due to a major fault power loss or test mode operation Note If the redundant CCB needs to take over from the Master CCB this is not considered to be a system failure and the system failure relay will remain in normal state Note During start up the system failure relay will be active until the CCB is available approximately 3 minutes 109 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 8 Maintenance This chapter describes how to perform common maintenance operations and upgrades The required frequency of inspection and maintenance will depend on local site conditions and will need to be established through experience Please refer to IEC EN 60079 29 2 or other local or national regulations for guidance on establishing an appropriate maintenance routine WARNING If
259. than the configured Gas Under Range Limit This fault may be due to the sensor signal drifting below the normal zero operating point Gas Under Range Latch Latching Non Latching Latching Gas Over Range Limit 110 FSD 100 FSD to 125 FSD The Gas Over Range Warning will be set if the calculated gas concentration is greater than the configured Gas Over Range Limit Gas Over Range Latch Latching Non Latching Latching 205 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 15 Appendix 2 Configurable Parameter Reference Guide 15 2 16 Calibration Reminder Settings Access Level Engineer Note Once the Calibration Overdue Warning is active it can only be cleared by calibrating the channel Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range Comment Calibration Reminder Enable Disabled Enabled Disabled Calibration Overdue Warning is set if the Calibration Reminder Interval is exceeded Calibration Reminder Interval 6 months 1 to 24 months Calibration reminder is calculated to the day e g if the reminder is set on 27 January for 6 months time the calibration overdue reminder will appear on 27 July 15 2 17 Calibration Signal Settings Access Level Engineer Note These settings refer to the range of signal values from the sensor over which calibration will be permitted and are used to avoid incorrect calibration e g due to a deca
260. that the channel configuration is correct and how to program any tags that are required Note It is necessary to configure any Digital Input channels and all Output channels Note Engineer level access is required Q g oe O No A 10 11 12 If not already logged in login with a valid engineer level user name From the System Status screen select the Extras icon then System Configuration Re enter the password and press Login Select System Setup The screen will show a list of all installed I O modules and Control Centre Board s Press the beside each module to expand and show the four channels of that module Select the required channel press the Menu icon x and select View Configuration Use the Next and Previous buttons to step through the configuration settings and verify that they are as expected If any settings are incorrect please refer to the section Editing a configured channel Press Exit Select the channel again press the Menu icon and select Edit Configuration From the menu window select Channel Name Settings The screen will show the current location tag and custom ID 13 Enter the required values in the field New Value and press Send 81 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 6 Commissioning 14 The system will return the new value press Accept to confirm 15 Press Exit and close the menu window 16 Repeat steps 7 15 for each configured channel 17 Proceed t
261. the failed module while the ones before it transmit in the other direction Thus the Touchpoint Pro system can immediately detect and locate a failed module without affecting the availability of the rest of the system For a single Touchpoint Pro Controller the Ring Network runs between the Communication Power Rail and the Control Module For a system with a Touchpoint Pro Controller and Remote units the network runs additionally over data cable between all the units in a system Note The Touchpoint Pro Ring Network does not accommodate spurs 21 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 2 Overview Introduction Ring Network 1 0 Module 2 1 0 Module 1 Touchpoint Pro Controller 1 0 Module 3 c 1 0 Module 4 Self healing Ring Network with Failure at Module 2 1 0 Module 2 e o Se d e ed 1 0 Module 1 Touchpoint Pro Controller a n 1 0 Module 3 MN lt ede e i Je eee PE 1 0 Module 4 Fig 2 4 Ring Network 2 6 Input Output I O modules Various types of I O modules are available each containing four channels A single Touchpoint Pro system can contain up to 64 input channels 16 input modules and 128 output channels 32 output modules 22 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 2 Overview Introduction 2 6 1 Available Modules Analogue I
262. the relays are switching mains voltages hazardous live terminals may be present within the Relay Output Module even if the Touchpoint Pro system is isolated 8 1 Testing the Touchpoint Pro System The UI navigation menu structure can be found in the MS Visio file on the CD 8 1 1 Introduction The Touchpoint Pro system has four test modes available which together enable a full test of the system The test modes are 1 LED Panel Test tests that all of the panel LEDs are working 2 Field Inputs Test test all input channel devices without affecting any outputs Gas test force mA confirmation of correct device connection etc 3 Configuration Settings Test force the Touchpoint Pro input channels to specific levels and view the corresponding states threshold alarm levels over range warning fault etc 4 Cause and Effect Test carried out from the output channel menu force the Touchpoint Pro input channels to specific states to test that the correct output channels are activated WARNING In all four test modes the Touchpoint Pro system is not operational as a safety system and any field device inputs will be ignored Caution During the Cause and Effect Test outputs will be generated and relays will be activated To avoid any unwanted activation of output devices e g emergency deluge disconnect them before starting the test When any of the test modes is active the System Failure relay will activate t
263. time interval the Inhibit Delay Time after power up in order to prevent false alarms e g during sensor warm up Fault Recovery Delay Enable Enabled Enabled Disabled lf enabled the channel will be inhibited for a specific time interval the Inhibit Delay Time after a channel fault condition has been cleared in order to prevent false alarms e g due to sensor recovery Inhibit Delay Time 30s 0 to 3000 s This is the delay time before a channel returns to normal operation if the Power On Delay or the Fault Recovery Delay are enabled 15 2 14 Signal Range Fault Settings Access Level Engineer Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range Comment Signal Under Range Limit 50 mV 90 to 5 mV The Signal Under Range Fault will be set if the sensor signal reading is less than the configured Signal Under Range Limit Signal Under Range Latch Latching Non Latching Latching Signal Over Range Limit 300 mV 25 to 360 mV The Signal Over Range Fault will be set if the sensor signal reading is greater than the configured Signal Over Range Limit Signal Over Range Latch Latching Non Latching Latching 15 2 15 Gas Range Fault Settings Access Level Engineer Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range Comment Gas Under Range Limit 10 FSD 24 FSD to 0 FSD The Gas Under Range Fault will be set if the calculated gas concentration is less
264. ting Instructions 19 Appendix 6 Glossary of Icons icon Module State is normal Channel state is normal Module is in configuration state Channel is in configuration state Module state is unconfigured 7 F y Channel state is unconfigured ZE Module state is to be tested Channel state is to be tested Module state is faulty Channel state is faulty CCB State Master Mode Normal CCB State Fault CCB State Idle fel DEEN BE CCB State Unconfigured 229 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 20 Appendix 7 Logged events and where they are displayed All of the events listed below are captured in the Event History of the system In addition some are displayed on the Active Events Input Output Details or Inputs Outputs screens as appropriate Each event is logged with a timestamp and if applicable the module or channel to which it applies Note ADC Analogue to Digital Converter AIM Analogue Input Module CCB Control Centre Board COB Communication Board DIM Digital Input Module FW Firmware HMI Human Machine Interface User Interface I O Input Output UI LHMI Local User Interface Touchscreen ROM Relay Output Module SW Software Where Displayed Y z Specific Event Comment Inpu
265. ting Instructions 20 Appendix 7 Logged events and where they are displayed Displayed we F Specific Event Comment Input Output Active Inputs Channel Type Details Details Events Outputs if applicable screen screen screen screen Fault Acknowledged All Fault Cleared Field Device Detached Field Device detected mA mV Field Input Test Mode Acknowledged Field Inputs Test ended Field Inputs Test started Y First Span Calibration Logs the first span calibration for a mV channel Gas Over Range Calculated gas concentration is Y mA mV greater than the configured Gas Over Range Limit Gas Over Range Cleared mA mV Gas Under Range Calculated gas concentration is Y mA mV less than the configured Gas Under Range Limit Gas Under Range Cleared mA mV Hardware Fault Hardware fault has occurred within the Control Module Hardware Fault acknowledged Hardware Fault cleared Hold Time Active Configured delay for ROM channel ROM de activation 1 0 Module Removed All Inhibit Y Y Y All Inhibit by CCB Channel has been inhibited by the CCB because it is being configured or one of the channels on the same module is being configured Inhibit Cleared All Inhibit Cleared by CCB Input Activation Acknowledged Logged when DIM input active is DIM acknowledged Input Active DIM channel active Y Y Y DIM Input Cleared Logged when DIM input act
266. tion has been cleared in order to prevent false alarms e g due to sensor recovery Inhibit Delay Time 30s 0 to 3000 s This is the delay time before a channel returns to normal operation if the Power On Delay or the Fault Recovery Delay are enabled 15 1 16 Signal Range Fault Settings Note When setting up the Gas Over Under Range and Signal Over Under Range limits take account of any diagnostic signals that may be generated by the field device under and over the measuring range Failure to do so may result in confusing or misleading messages Remember that up to 5 Custom Transmitter Faults and Inhibit Signalling are available so that diagnostic information from the transmitter can be clearly understood Note When commissioning or testing sensors with a Transmitter check that all fault messages from the 4 20 mA transmitter match the Touchpoint Pro settings Some typical diagnostic signal levels and equivalent FSD values that may be used by intelligent transmitters are given below Diagnostic level Equivalent FSD 22 mA 112 5 21 mA 106 25 3mA 6 25 2 5 mA 9 4 2 mA 12 5 1 5 mA 15 6 1 mA 18 75 197 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 15 Appendix 2 Configurable Parameter Reference Guide Access Level Engineer Parameter Name Default Value Range Comment Setting Signal Under Range
267. tom of the screen 3 Send the values to the system The system will return the new values 4 Check and confirm that the settings are correct then press Accept 210 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 16 Appendix 3 Wiring Diagrams 16 1 AIM 4 20 mA with 3 Wire Device Powered by AIM mA Recommended Cable 3 Core Twisted Mesh Type Shielded 1 5mm or 2 5mm AIM mA Module 3 Wire Detector Input 1 Channel 1 Channel 2 6 Ja ees o ME Li Li 3 Wire Detector i Input 3 re oo E 240 Channel 3 9 n m L ADC l l 3 Wire Detector i Input 4 ro 42400 Channel 4 Note 1 For all shielded cables shield screen should be connected to Earth tag bar bus bar provided in Touchpoint Pro enclosure 211 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 16 Appendix 3 Wiring Diagrams 16 2 AIM 4 20 mA with 2 Wire Device Powered by AIM mA Recommended Cable 2 Core Twisted Mesh Type AIM mA Module 2 Wire Detector Shielded 1 5mm or 2 5mm i Input 1 24VDC Channel 1 i hog l j I OVDC T e e e e I I 2 Wire Detector Input 2 _ x p l l 24VDC V Channel 2 j OVDC l Li Li 2 Wire Detector Input 3 r m l Channel 3 L m a I I I 2 Wire Detector I Input 4 4 p m I 24VDC Channel 4 Note 1 For all shielded cables shiel
268. trator account should be created during commissioning and the default account should then be deleted Two Administrator accounts are safer than one as lost passwords cannot be recovered A Honeywell authorised engineer can rescue a locked out Administrator but this requires an on site Service call and installation of a special token and one time pass phrase Note Administrator level access is required to create an Administrator level user Note User names and passwords are case sensitive Operator level users cannot change passwords via PC Configuration software A maximum number of 20 users can be added to the Touchpoint Pro system An Administrator level user can create other Administrator and lower level users An Engineer level user can create other Engineer and lower level users It is recommended that when no longer required the default user Touchpoint Pro is deleted or has the password changed to prevent unauthorised access The following rules apply to user names and passwords e The user name must be 4 to 20 characters long e The password cannot contain the user name e The password must be 8 to 10 characters long e The password must contain a mix of letters numbers and symbols e The password cannot contain a string of three or more repeated characters e Passwords with repeated characters may be rejected Caution Touchpoint Pro allows login by the same user from different access points local User Interface Web Ser
269. tzmaske Systems e Webserverzertifikat entfernen Name des Technikers Telefonnummer des Technikers Name des Zentrums Telefonnummer des Zentrums y MAC Adresse Standard Gateway IP Adresse des Druckers y y 223 Schnittstellenparameter Prim re Slave Adresse Secondary Slave Address Sekund re Slave Adresse e Zeit f r Hintergrundbeleuchtung Kundenname Kundenstandort e Hardware Version Zugriff auf Bedienfeld kalibrieren y e Sprachwahl y Fur jede Option Komponenten Update Zugriff auf Optionen Softwareaktualisierung Zu installierende Version der neuen Komponente anzeigen Version der momentan installierten Komponente anzeigen Bestatigen Abbrechen vor Beginn der Aktualisierung y System ID System ID lt Eingabe gt MAN0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 18 Appendix 5 User Interface Software Menu Structure 18 1 2 Sequence of System Configuration Screens for Local Configuration and PC Configuration SW Touchpoint Pro Mentfolge fur lokale Benutzeroberflache und Webserver Navigationsleiste Lokale Benutzeroberflach e und Webserver Startbildschirm e Logo Begrii ungsmeldung e Diagnosemeldungen dynamische Navigationsleiste WebServer Globale Einstellungen Syste figuration e Servicekontakt E
270. uchpoint Pro Operating Instructions Description Suitable for redundant operation of DC 24 V Input Voltage Range 8 4 36 4 VDC Number of Inputs 2 Input Current max 20 A per input Output Reverse Voltage max 40 VDC Output Current max 40A Output Voltage Drop 72 mV typical for input 2 x 10 A 140 mV typical for input 2 x 20 A Dimensions 36 mm x 124 mm x 127 mm W x H x D Storage Conditions 40 C to 70 C Operating Conditions 40 C to 85 C 5 to 95 RH 10 4 6 Uninterruptible Power Supply Module UPS Description 23 3 VDC 30 VDC Input Current 70 mA typical internal current consumption Current consumption for battery charging in constant current mode at 24V input 1 7 A typical at battery selector position lt 10Ah 3 4 A typical at battery selector position gt 10Ah Output Voltage DC 24 V nominal in Normal Operation Adjustable in Battery Operation Output Current Max 25 A in Normal Operations min 20 A in Battery Operation Allowed Batteries 2x12V 3 9 Ah 130 Ah VRLA sealed lead acid type Dimension 46 mm x 124 mm x 127 mm W x Hx D Operating Conditions 40 C to 70 C 5 to 95 RH non condensing Operating Humidity 5 to 95 RH non condensing De rating 60 C to 70 C 0 5A C Storage Conditions 40 C to 85 C 5 to 95 RH non condensing 150 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15
271. uctions 15 Appendix 2 Configurable Parameter Reference Guide 15 1 22 Fault Signalling Settings 1 Access Level Engineer Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range Comment Custom Transmitter Fault Disabled Enabled Disabled If enabled a specific signal level from the sensor will activate a 1 Enable custom fault condition for the channel An example of a custom fault is the Beam Block condition for an open path IR detector Custom Transmitter Fault Disabled Enabled Disabled 2 Enable Custom Transmitter Fault Disabled Enabled Disabled 3 Enable 15 1 23 Fault Signalling Settings 2 Access Level Engineer Parameter Name Custom Transmitter Fault 4 Enable Custom Transmitter Fault 5 Enable Default Setting Disabled Disabled Value Range Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Comment If enabled a specific signal level from the sensor will activate a custom fault condition for the channel An example of a custom fault is the Beam Block condition for an open path IR detector 15 1 24 Custom Fault X Detail Settings The Fault details can be set for each of the enabled custom faults Access Level Engineer Parameter Name Custom Transmitter Fau Default Setting Custom Fault 1 Value Range Maximum 20 Alphanumeric Comment This is the fault description which will be displayed
272. udes Controller with HMI PCBs TPPR HF FS LXMHPF with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs erface Board with 100mm plinth forced ventilation w o power distribution oor Standing Cabin D Card Modbus In oO S F SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board with 100mm plinth forced ventilation w o power distribution F S TPPR HF FS LRMHPF Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board Modbus Interface Board with 100mm plinth forced ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF FS LXXXPF Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card w o HON Logo with 100mm plinth forced ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF FS LRXXPF Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board with 100mm plinth w o HON Logo forced ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF FS LXMXPF Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Modbus Interface Board with 100mm plinth w o HON Logo forced ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF FS LRMXPF Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redund
273. udes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Modbus Interface Board with 100mm plinth w o HON Logo forced ventilation w o power distribution TPPR HF RS LRMXPF Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card Redundant Control Centre Board Modbus Interface Board with 100mm plinth w o HON Logo forced ventilation w o power distribution Q lan oO 174 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 12 Ordering Information 12 5 TPPR W PSUs TPPR W PSUs TPPR W 000 1 2 Way DC Distribution Only TPPR W 000 2 4 Way DC Distribution Only TPPR W 000 3 8 Way DC Distribution Only TPPR W 005 1 5A PSU Only TPPR W 010 1 10A PSU Only TPPR W 020 1 20A PSU Only TPPR W 005 2 5A PSU UPS TPPR W 010 2 10A PSU UPS TPPR W 020 2 20A PSU UPS TPPR W 005 3 2 x 5A PSU RDN TPPR W 010 3 2x 10A PSU RDN TPPR W 020 3 2x 20A PSU RDN 4 Way DC Distribution TPPR W 005 4 2x 5A PSU RDN UPS TPPR W 010 4 2x 10A PSU RDN UPS TPPR W 020 4 2x 20A PSU RDN UPS 4 Way DC Distribution TPPR W 020 5 20A PSU 4 Way DC Distribution TPPR W 020 6 20A PSU UPS 4 Way DC Distribution TPPR W 040 1 2x 20A RDN Power Distribution TPPR W 040 2 2x 20A RDN UPS Power Distr
274. uipment must be earthed using the earth terminals provided Earth loops must be avoided Touchpoint Pro must be connected to protective earth Connect protective earth usually mains earth to the earth stud marked with the primary earth symbol Do not remove any factory fitted earth connections Location of primary earth connection point e Standard enclosure lower left corner e Rack mount unit reverse side lower left corner The screen of the Ring Network cable and the screens of field device cables should be connected to earth at the controller preferably to a clean instrument earth The Wall mount enclosures contain a pre fitted screen bar for earthing the field cables A suitable termination is provided for the ring cables and earth terminals for all others It is recommended that an earth screen bar be installed in the Touchpoint Pro enclosure rack to connect the field and network cable screens If armoured or steel wire braided cable is used for field devices and earthed in the field it is recommended that care is exercised to avoid earth ground loops by preventing cable armour from coming into contact with the TPPR enclosure or cable screening The diagrams below show some examples of good earthing and screening practice a Three Core Cable with Screen Earthed at Contoller pg Junction lololo Box pf Se P C Sensor Incoming a Figure 4 2 Screened cable plastic junction box and plastic sensor a
275. ule RJ45 Mechanical interface of the standard Ethernet connector ROM Relay Output Module RTC Real Time Clock SD Secure Digital FLASH memory card Soc System On a Chip SFF Safe Failure Fraction T90 Sensor Response Time UART Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter UDID Unique Device Identifier UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply WAN Wide Area Network 221 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 18 Appendix 5 User Interface Software Menu Structure 18 1 Menu Structure The diagrams on the following pages show the menu structure of the interface software They can be used to gain familiarity with the interface and to assist navigation Note The pages of sections 18 1 1 and 18 1 2 can be printed out to show the complete menu structure Each box indicates a screen and shows the title of the screen and the contents Note that if the PC Configuration software is used several of the screens are combined to take advantage of the larger display Note After 20 minutes of inactivity the system will always logout the user and return to the System Status screen 222 MAN0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 18 Appendix 5 User Interface Software Menu Structure 18 1 1 Screen Navigation Sequence for Local Ul and WebServer Touchpoint Pro Menufolge fur lokale Benutzeroberflache und Webserver Startbildschirm e __ Logo BegriiRungsmeldung e Diagnosemeldungen dynam
276. ust Empfindlichkeitskalibrierung f r Eingangskanal eingeleitet i01 Kalibriergas zuf hren nnehmen Abbrechen Figure 8 12 Apply Span Gas 11 View the reading until it is stable and then press Accept 12 Confirm that the gas reading is correct and press Save then OK 13 Remove the span gas from the sensor and confirm that the gas reading has returned to zero 14 Select Clear Inhibit to remove the inhibit from the channel 8 10 Touchpoint Pro Battery Box 8 10 1 DC UPS LED Indications The DC UPS module has a range of LEDs that indicate UPS system states as listed both on the DC US module cover and in the table below These LEDs should be checked regularly and before isolating the battery or mains power supplies Note TPPR batteries are replaced as a pair Battery Center Tap is not used and individual status is not shown 126 MANO0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 8 Maintenance Dimevsiow A J ri moo Umie y Buller wilopy Battery Indication Flashing Sequence 1 On eee AT ce S Key Battery Size Sets the charging current This should be gt 10Ah for the TPPR 12Ah or 27Ah batteries which gives a charging current of 3 0A Buffering The input voltage is below the transfer threshold level and the TPPR is running on battery power buffering See Buffertime below Buffertime A DC UPS supplying n
277. vailable in the following ratings 120 W 5 A at 24 Vdc 240 W 10 A at 24 Vdc 480 W 20 A at 24 Vdc The power supplies have status outputs which can be connected to dedicated inputs on the Touchpoint Pro Controller to give a signal if there is a failure of an individual power supply unit 2 9 2 Touchpoint Pro Power Redundancy Module RDN The Redundancy Module controls two input DC power supplies maximum 20 A each If one supply fails the Redundancy Module will switch over to the other supply maintaining the DC output Alarm relays are provided which will open if one of the input supplies fails Redundancy Module Load max 20A Figure 2 6 Power redundancy configuration 25 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 2 Overview Introduction 2 9 3 Touchpoint Pro UPS Module with Backup Battery The UPS Module can be used in combination with the separate Touchpoint Pro Battery Box to protect against failure of the AC supply as shown below DC AC Bg o o DC 12V 24V 24V Battery Power DC UPS 24V Supply Load 12V Battery Figure 2 7 UPS and Battery Backup configuration The Battery Box contains a pair of 12 V sealed lead acid batteries with either 12 Ah or 27 Ah capacity Note The UPS Module requires an input supply voltage of 26 32 Vdc 26 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 3 Mechanical Installation 3 1 Siting
278. ver etc To maintain traceability of system operation and changes ensure good discipline is maintained with regard to security of login details 77 MANO923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 6 Commissioning If not already logged in login with a valid engineer or administrator level user name From the System Status screen select the Extras icon then System Configuration Re enter the password and press Login ne al he Select User Management 4 5 To add anew user select the Add User icon Gil a and fill in the new user name password and access level See the Chapter User Interface for details of the available access levels 6 Press Add to add the new user Press Back and Home to return to the System Status screen 6 5 Setup Web Server Note Engineer level access is required To connect via Web Server the Touchpoint Pro must be connected to a network The Touchpoint Pro Ethernet port is 10 100 Mbps Ethernet cable must be CAT5e or CAT6 Ethernet cable terminated to TIA EIA 568B standard The cable should have shielded RJ45 plugs with the shield of the cable connected to the metal body shield of the connector plug The cable length should not exceed 100 m Note Web Server performance will depend on the network infrastructure Note The Web Server is optimised for a screen of 1024x768 pixels For optimum viewing on other screens it may be necessary to view full screen and turn off the Internet Explorer
279. versions TPPR V 1250 Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card w o ventilation with pre drilled mounting plate TPPR V 1252 Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card natural ventilation with pre drilled mounting plate TPPR V 1254 Floor Standing Cabinet with Front Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card forced ventilation with pre drilled mounting plate TPPR V 1260 Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card w o ventilation with pre drilled mounting plate TPPR V 1262 Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card natural ventilation with pre drilled mounting plate TPPR V 1264 Floor Standing Cabinet with Rear Access 2000Hx800Wx600D includes Controller with HMI PCBs SD Card forced ventilation with pre drilled mounting plate 2 Touchpoint Pro Components Input and Output Modules 1 0 Modules PPR V 1000 Analogue Input Module 4 20mA TPPR V 1010 Analogue Input Module mV Bridge TPPR V 1030 Digital Input Module TPPR V 1040 Relay Output Module Power Supplies TPPR V 0500 Power Supply Redundancy Module 40A TPPR V 0501 UPS 40A DC Module TPPR V 0502 5A 120W 24 Vdc PSU TPPR V 0503 10A 240W 24 Vdc PSU TPPR V 0504 20A 480W 24 Vdc
280. w Output Channels Note In the Touchscreen view the Inputs and Outputs icons toggle from the System Status screen navigation bar only the Inputs icon is visible the Outputs icon is visible from the Inputs screen and vice versa 1 From the System Status screen navigation bar select the Inputs icon then the Outputs icon 105 MAN0923_Issue 3_04 15 Touchpoint Pro Operating Instructions 7 Normal Operation a P R P i Ausgange 1D Tertnes lsu Figure 7 15 Outputs Screen 2 A list of all output channels is shown in order of channel ID The channel ID location tag and status are shown 3 The list can be filtered by status Fault Inhibit Warning or All 4 F P All Outputs E v 300 D Location Tao aA ge Fault Inhibit Warning Figure 7 16 Outputs Screen with filter options 4 Select a channel Depending on access level a number of options are shown Function Access Comment Level Inhibit Engineer Inhibits the channel On an inhibited channel this option is Clear Inhibit See Normal Operation Inhibit for more information Force Operator Option to force a relay output channel to its active state or force an analogue output channel to a set mA Engineer level On a forced channel this option is Clear Force See Maintenance Ch 8 1 Testing the Touchpoint Pro System for more information Note Operator level access is required to Force a channel Engineer level access is required to Cl
281. well Analytics
282. will time The system will automatically request a new login out after 20 minutes of inactivity 108 CCB COB communication failed Please refer to error 2 Please refer to error 2 109 Operation failed CCB is not Please refer to error 2 Please refer to error 2 responding 110 Channel cannot be commissioned Touchpoint Pro has a f more channels than 64 inputs and 128 outputs no free Channel ID available Please maximum capacity of are required an additional Touchpoint Pro system is de commission an adequate channel 64 input and 128 output needed Contact your local representative to discuss and try again channels your requirements 114 Operation failed invalid command Please refer to error 2 Please refer to error 2 code received from CCB 112 Module cannot be commissioned Touchpoint Pro has a f more channels than 64 inputs and 128 outputs You have exceeded the maximum maximum capacity of are required an additional Touchpoint Pro system is number of 48 I O modules Use the 16 Input and 32 Output needed Contact your local representative to discuss Remove Module or Replace Module Modules your requirements function in the System Configuration 113 Not used 114 Restore operation failed backup file An error occurred during 1 Check that the correct file is being used for the could not be found configuration restore restore operation and is saved as Hard Disk Touchpoint Pro Configuration Touchpoint ProConfig bin 2 Retry the oper
283. wledge from the popup menu This will acknowledge all active events for the channel Note Operator access level is required 3 From the Active Events screen select the fault or warning and select Acknowledge from the popup menu This will acknowledge only the selected fault or warning When a fault or warning is acknowledged the channel LED and icon will stop flashing Note The Accept button on the front panel of the Touchpoint Pro must be pressed for gt 0 5 s to take effect 7 5 3 Reset a latched Fault or Warning Note Operator access level is required A latched fault or warning can be reset in three ways 1 Press the Reset button on the front panel of the Touchpoint Pro This will reset ALL latched alarms faults and warnings provided that the event has cleared It will also reset any latched relay outputs 2 From the Inputs or Outputs screen select the channel and select Reset from the popup menu This will reset all latched events for the channel provided that the input signal has returned to Normal status 3 From the Active Events screen select the fault or warning and select Reset from the popup menu This will reset only the selected fault or warning Note The Reset button on the front panel of the Touchpoint Pro must be pressed for gt 0 5 s to be effective 7 6 Inhibit Note Engineer access level is required Both input and output channels can be inhibited 1 From the System Status screen navigation bar se
284. ying sensor or incorrect application of gas Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range Comment Maximum Zero Offset 100 mV O mV to 200 mV During calibration the Zero Signal Too High warning is set if the Zero signal exceeds the Maximum Zero Offset Minimum Zero Offset 90 mV 90 mVtoO0 mV During calibration the Zero Signal Too Low warning is set if the Zero signal is below the Minimum Zero Offset Maximum Span Signal 100 mV 100 to 300 mV During calibration the Calibration Signal Too High warning will be set if the span signal exceeds the Maximum Span Signal Minimum Span Signal 0 mV 50 to 100 mV During calibration the Calibration Signal Too Low warning will be set if the span signal is below the Minimum Span Signal 15 2 18 Calibration Span Gas Settings Access Level Engineer Note These settings refer to the range of gas concentration values that can be used for span calibration and are used to ensure that the sensor is calibrated at an appropriate level Parameter Name Default Setting Value Range Comment Maximum Span Gas Conc 100 FSD 80 to 100 FSD Sets the Maximum Span Gas Concentration that can be used According to during calibration Must be greater than the Minimum Span sensor range Gas Conc Minimum Span Gas Conc 30 FSD 15 to 80 FSD Sets the Minimum Span Gas Concentration that can be used According to during
285. ying to done by forcing the output from the sensor where the calibrate zero is outside facility exists Check the configured limits on zero and the configured limits span gas calibration and ensure that the forced mA value is within the limits 2 For a mA channel where the sensor has no facility to force the output consult the manufacturer s instructions and carry out a calibration at the sensor 3 For a mV channel there may be a problem with the sensor or the calibration gas Consult the manufacturer s instructions 52 Zero gas calibration failed zero The level at which the Please refer to error 51 signal too high channel is trying to calibrate zero is outside the configured limits 53 Span gas calibration failed span The level at which the Please refer to error 51 signal too low channel is trying to calibrate span is outside the configured limits 54 Span gas calibration failed span The level at which the Please refer to error 51 signal too high channel is trying to calibrate span is outside the configured limits 55 Gas calibration failed sensor Touchpoint Pro monitors 1 Contact your local service representative to lifetime exceeded The sensor the performance of mV schedule a sensor replacement sensitivity has fallen to below 50 sensors relative to their 2 When the replacement sensor has been fitted of its original value please replace first span calibration repeat calibration in accordance with the instructions the se

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Supersonic SC-409 car media receiver    PC リモートパワーオンアダプタ取扱説明書  Samsung HT-C6500 Käyttöopas  041  EW Series Filter with GridLok Filtre de série EW avec  the LG Leon LTE User Guide  BT-BC 10 E  Leia o manual em PDF  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file